JP2022060480A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably improving amusement.

SOLUTION: Regarding a variation time reduction function operating after completion of a special game state, the variation time reduction function is completed in occurrence of a predetermined number of times of minor jackpot winning after starting operating the variation time reduction function. In this manner, by applying the number of times of satisfaction of minor jackpots as a completion condition of the variation time reduction function operating after the special game state, new amusement for completing the variation time reduction function according to the number of satisfaction times of minor jackpots can be added in a game machine capable of generating a minor jackpot game state.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big prize opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won. In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, as a lottery result by the lottery, a lottery result (for example, a small hit) that allows a game ball to win a prize in a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit has been provided to diversify the game. Also known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-189873

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of the gaming machine because a lottery result is provided so that the gaming ball can win a prize in the winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving playability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A lottery means for performing a big hit and a small hit lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and a normal gaming state is obtained when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result corresponding to the predetermined big hit winning. When a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the above is generated and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result corresponding to a predetermined small hit winning without the occurrence of the special gaming state, the predetermined small A gaming machine that generates a predetermined specific gaming state corresponding to a winning win.
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result, after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is generated, and the advantage When the predetermined number of small hits is won after the start of the gaming state and the specific gaming state corresponding to the winning of the predetermined small hit occurs, the advantageous gaming state is changed from the advantageous gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. It is characterized by being provided with a game state control means for transitioning to a different game state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Flow chart showing an example of nail state related processing Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment A flowchart showing an example of the main control main process in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. A flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. Flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (A) is a front view showing the right side portion of the gaming board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, (B) is a partially enlarged view of the right-starting winning device, and (C) is A-A of FIG. 20 (B). Cross-sectional view of the right start winning device on line A Flow chart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment Explanatory drawing comparing the specifications of the game in each game state Explanatory drawing relating to game specifications in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment Explanatory drawing relating to game specifications in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment Explanatory drawing relating to game specifications in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment A screen view showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device in the high-probability state and time-saving game state generated after the special game state. A flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment.

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, with respect to the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shows. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and a pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the middle block 103 on the front side, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the front block 102 is rotatably supported forward with respect to the intermediate block 103 and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 backward with respect to the intermediate block 103 so as to be rotatable rearward. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation by the predetermined operation key for the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated are provided in these three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C. By rotating the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction changes in the closed state of the rear block 104, whereby the open / close prohibition posture corresponding to the open / close prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture, the open / close prohibited state and the open / close allowable state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, the two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them were formed in the rear block 104 in the open / closed state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C corresponding to the remaining portion exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement control mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement control mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow control piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, it is regulated. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be offset to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side when viewed from the front). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. Upper protrusion 217, lower protrusion 218 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and upper protrusion 217 and lower protrusion 217 on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged in the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged in the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 (see FIG. 3) and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game field. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 for operating the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage unit 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation for the ball removal operation member 232 is performed.

The bottom surface of the reservoir 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. Behind the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball due to the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launcher 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and a right side edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C as a light emitting portion, and frame emission corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of an apparatus 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent out of the game balls. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the launch operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of pushing operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of up / down / left / right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be feasible by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launcher 330 (see FIG. 3) that ejects, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and controls the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the substrate 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning back from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area is generally divided into an outer peripheral portion by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 of the game board 400. It is provided with a guiding member 335 for guiding to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launching device 330 operates in response to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250, and the drive control of the launching solenoid 334 changes according to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250 to adjust the launching force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is housed in a translucent board case 391 sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace like the main control board 920, and the game board 400 is housed in the sub-control board 940. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of a game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device according to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 to detect the game ball that entered the right starting winning device 432, lower big winning switch 443 to detect the game ball that entered the lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device Top prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operation device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the start device 436, and below. Non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the grand prize device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower prize-winning device 433. The game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 for detecting the game ball that has entered the game board, and general prize switches 449A and 449B for detecting the game ball that has entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

Further, the gaming board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401 through a through hole formed in the substrate 401. .. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided on the most downstream side portion of the game area.

A launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10) is provided in the collection / discharge passage. The launch ball detection switch 451 is composed of, for example, a pass-through type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls fired in the game area, and a signal corresponding to this number of game balls is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 as an external terminal board. It is output via 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The game ball whose passage is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 in the collection / discharge passage passes through the discharge port provided in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is provided from the pachinko machine 100 to the game ball circulation device in the game hall. It is discharged (not shown). When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or is a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning slot in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right entry control mechanism 452 and a right entry control mechanism that change the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by shifting between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives the 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Can be narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. By arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened, the game ball can enter the right start winning device 432. The right entry control mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower prize winning device 433 has a lower entry control mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism. By shifting between the lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry control mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the approach allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. Further, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to the non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture in which it is immersed backward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 has an upper entry control mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism. An upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When the player is in the admissible posture, the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434 by opening the entrance of the upper entry control mechanism 454.

As for the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry restriction mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning opening (or entry opening) of each device is used. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry control mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry control solenoid 463 and the upper entry control solenoid 464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an approach allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowable posture of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. It returns to the non-induction posture according to the stop of the solenoid 465.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting the conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special gaming state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 to start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of it. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may be configured to start operation after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variation display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in the light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing determination of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing determination. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emission states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of hold times by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473, which displays the normal symbol in a variable manner along with the normal symbol lottery, and confirms and displays the normal symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not always start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, on the game board 400, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) composed of a 7-segment display can be visually recognized in a state where the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103 (see FIG. 10). For example, it is provided in the upper left corner portion of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or difficult to see from the player, and cannot be seen by the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example,). , A position that overlaps the back side of the front block 102 and is separated from the light-transmitting visual recognition portion of the central panel 220).

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Performs various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is a state in which the variation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time saving state"). handle.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower prize winning device 433) during the special gaming state that shifts based on the winning. The game state that shifts after the special game state differs depending on whether or not it is. When the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction state"). (Also referred to as)), and the game state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”) in which the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). In the following, it will also be referred to as "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is shortened and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability variable gaming state") which is (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), after which the game returns to the normal game state. Further, the probabilistic game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration may further include a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states, or a configuration may be configured in which the gaming states are shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operation of the main device of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers related to the special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the middle start winning switch 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they will be started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even if the player is not in the special game state, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

Further, the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. It may be a configuration in which the unit superiority control according to the above is executed, or a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative and can be changed at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot. A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a constant pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative design, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variation display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a decorative symbol. The definite display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the large winning switch 443, 444 or a predetermined maximum during each approach allowable posture in the lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454. When the permissible approach time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an approach allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first permissible posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and then a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the start winning of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the gaming state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variable display according to a constant pattern over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach control mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probabilistic gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry control mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, a winner must be won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the entry allowable state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability related to the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowable state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time-saving state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the short-time game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central part of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball is flowed down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

The player can selectively perform the left-handed game method and the right-handed game method by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252. That is, the player can perform the left-handed game technique by operating the launch handle 252 with a rotation operation amount such that the game ball does not flow down mainly on the right side of the central structure 420. On the other hand, the player operates the firing handle 252 with a rotation operation amount such that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the central structure 420, that is, a rotation operation amount stronger than that when the game is played by the left-handed game method. By doing so, the right-handed game technique can be performed.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. The tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, the case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding the game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and the payout of the game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. And the relay device 950 that relays the signal between the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and the card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100, and the state of the pachinko machine 100. It is provided with an external terminal board 580 which is a board for outputting a signal to a management device (not shown).

The substrate 501 is integrally molded from a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side to which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 is gradually heightened as a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion having a lower top surface and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height overlapped vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously and is continuous downward. Further, in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530, a ball breakage detecting unit 539 for detecting a ball breakage is provided. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the substrate 501 so as to be located at the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the external terminal board 580 is provided at the upper right end portion of the rear block 104 when viewed from the rear. The external terminal board 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during the special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 and the like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 volt) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volt), and generates various electric power from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power supply monitoring board 910 is supplied with internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. The drive voltage and the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine can be used by turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254 that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1), and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is set. On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is slowed down. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal sets the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900, the power supply / emission control board 900, and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901, and this When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU has a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible and connected. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may be configured to have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the configuration, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be capable of information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be capable of information output communication only in one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, the program start process S1001 that sets the initial value in the stack pointer (a part of the area of the RAM) that controls the execution of the program, the interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets the interrupt mode, and the payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, the determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, the determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and the storage. The information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not to erase the stored information in the RAM based on these determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM return setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information are initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the holding information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 receive the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game state in the power failure state is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state is the time saving state or the non-time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is reached. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start process S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. This prohibits interrupts other than this timer interrupt. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the nail state related process S1222 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the nail state related process S1222 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1223 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is in a power failure state, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. To. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is used. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also specified except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first variation. If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

It should be noted that the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter has another configuration. For example, a configuration in which a constant initial value is updated without using an initial value counter may be used, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary may be used. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448, the general winning switch 449A, 449B, and the launch ball detection switch 451 are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting prize device 432, the lower prize winning device 433, and the upper prize winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific passage of the lower prize winning device 433 by vibration. , Induction of forced malfunction of right start prize device 432, lower prize prize device 433 and upper prize prize device 434 by radio waves, guidance of game balls to various prize devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle start prize device 431A, There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding the game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower grand winning device 433, and upper grand winning device 434 at an abnormal timing have been performed. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right-start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right-start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block is provided with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one prize is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the prize is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the prize is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize ball is continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Nail state related processing S1222>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the nail state-related process S1222 executed in the main control interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the nail state related process S1222.

The nail state-related process S1222 is a process of detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and displaying and outputting the result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related process S1222 is composed of the first half processes S1401 to S1405 related to the detection of the state of the nail 411 and the second half processes S1501 to S1504 related to the display of the result based on the detection.

In the nail state-related processing S1222, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the number of game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B (hereinafter referred to as “general prize number”), and the game balls launched into the game area. It is determined whether or not the number (hereinafter referred to as "the number of launched balls") is being counted (hereinafter referred to as "counting period") (S1401). In this way, by counting the number of general prizes and the number of launched balls only during the counting period, the ratio of the number of general prizes to the number of launched balls (that is, the game to the general winning devices 439A and 439B with respect to the number of launched balls). When the ball approach rate) is calculated, it is difficult for the calculation result to be adversely affected by fraud or averaging of numerical values.

The "counting period" which is the determination standard of S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined counting valid period in the entire period in which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, and the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. It may be a period excluding a predetermined counting invalid period out of the entire period.

The "counting valid period" may be, for example, a period during which the game ball is launched from the launching device 330. Whether or not the game ball is launched from the launching device 330 is determined by, for example, the variable resistor 253 that detects the rotational operation amount of the launching handle 252, or the contact that detects that the player is in contact with the launching handle 252. It may be determined by the presence or absence of a predetermined firing operation based on the detection state of the sensor 254. For example, when it is detected by the variable resistor 253 that a rotation operation is applied to the firing handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is launched from the launching device 330, or the contact sensor 254 may be determined. When the contact with the launch handle 252 is detected, it may be determined that the game ball is launched from the launch device 330.

Further, the "counting valid period" may be a case where a predetermined firing operation is executed, or a game ball is detected by the launching ball detection switch 451 within the flow elapsed time after the execution is completed. As the elapsed flow time after the execution of the predetermined firing operation, the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) via the route that takes the longest time among the times detected by the launching ball detection switch 451 after the gaming ball is launched. ) Is preferably set, and the elapsed flow time is preferably set to a sufficient time in consideration of design variations in the maximum time actually measured. Further, for example, the shortest route among the times detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is launched so that the fixed time after the start of the predetermined launch operation is not set as the counting valid period. The counting valid period may be set to the time excluding the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) via.

The "counting invalid period" may be, for example, during a special gaming state. Whether or not the game is in the special gaming state can be determined based on, for example, the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, the period from the start of output of the signal indicating that the signal indicating that the signal is in the special gaming state to the end of the output of the signal can be determined to be in the special gaming state.

Further, the "counting invalid period" may be, for example, a period in which the front block 102 is in the open state (that is, the front block 102 is in the open state with respect to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is in the open state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10).

The game ball that entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B when the front block 102 was in the open state was not a game ball that flowed down the game area and entered properly, but was a factory shipping inspector and cheating while playing a game. There is a possibility that it is a game ball thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B by a person who performs the above (hereinafter referred to as a cheating person) or a person concerned on the game hall side (for example, an employee of the game hall). By excluding the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state from the counting period, the game balls thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be excluded from the counting target.

Alternatively, for example, when the continuous throwing of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the counting invalid period. As a result, after the continuous throwing of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be excluded from the counting target by the continuous throwing.

Whether or not the game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is determined by, for example, the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B within a predetermined time, and whether or not the game balls have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It may be detected from the approach interval of the approaching game ball.

For example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) for each general prize device 439A, 439B, the game balls are continuously inserted into the general prize devices 439A, 439B. It may be detected that it has been turned on. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more game balls enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), the game is played in the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It may be detected that the sphere is continuously thrown.

On the other hand, the "predetermined period", which is the counting invalid period after the continuous input of the game balls to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), and then. It may be a period during which the game ball is continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. In the "period during which the game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B", for example, after the continuous input is detected, the continuous input is subsequently detected under the same conditions as the detection. It may be a period of time. Alternatively, considering that continuous charging is performed intermittently, continuous charging is performed under the same conditions as the detection of continuous charging within a few tens of seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or about 1 minute). The detected period may be set as "the period during which the game ball is continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B".

Further, the invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ball is detected for each of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is a counting invalid period for invalidating the counting for the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is short. Even if it is continuously thrown into, only the first predetermined invalid number (for example, 1 ball or 2 balls) may be counted, and the entry of a certain number of subsequent game balls may be invalidated, or the first ball may be invalidated. The entry of all the game balls continuously thrown including the predetermined invalid number may be excluded from the counting target and invalidated. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that the game ball will enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B. Corresponding to the probability that the game ball continuously enters in any of the right-handed game methods), the higher the probability, the shorter the invalid period may be set, and if the probability is low, the invalid period may be set longer. Further, the time may be set corresponding to the number (for example, the number of payouts) to be paid out when the game balls enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B. For example, the number of winning devices with a small number of payouts (for example, 3 balls) may be set. For a short invalid period (for example, about 1.2 seconds), and for a winning device with a large number of payouts (for example, 15 balls), a long invalid period (for example, about 2.4) is set. Seconds) may be set. Further, as the counting invalid period, a time corresponding to the firing time interval of the game ball (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set, and for example, an invalid period (abbreviated) that is twice or more the firing time interval of the game ball. 1.2 seconds or more) may be set, or an invalid period of 4 times or more (approximately 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Further, it is preferable that the predetermined invalid number is set to be larger as the approach probability of the game ball is higher, and is set to be smaller when the approach probability is low. Then, a general winning number counter and a firing ball number counter are provided for each of the plurality of winning devices (for example, the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B), and the nail state level can be output separately. Often, in this case, in each winning device in which counting is performed, at least one of the high and low of the entry probability of the game ball or the number of payouts is set to be different, and the length of the invalid period or the predetermined invalid number corresponds to the setting. It is preferable that at least one of the settings is different.

When the front block 102 is in the open state and the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period is set as the counting invalid period, and a combination of a plurality of conditions is used. You may want to generate an invalid period when is satisfied. As a result, the game balls continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B by the persons concerned on the game hall side can be suitably excluded from the counting target.

Alternatively, the "counting period" which is the determination standard of S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied in the entire period in which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. The "predetermined counting start condition" may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (for example, 11:00 am or 3:00 pm) or every predetermined period (for example, every two hours). It may be the start time of counting. Further, the "predetermined counting start condition" is, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol becomes a predetermined value predetermined as the counting start condition). Or, the timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting start condition) may be used. The above counting start time, counting start time interval, and predetermined timing do not necessarily have to be the same every day or every time, and one of a plurality of different preset settings can be selected. The selection order may be a predetermined order (for example, the setting may be different for each day of the week), or the selection order may be determined by lottery each time. It may be changed at random. Further, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times a day.

Further, the "predetermined period", which is the counting period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, may be, for example, the period until the predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The "predetermined counting end condition" may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1:00 pm or 6:00 pm) or a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing as the counting end condition may be, for example, the timing at which the predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed as the counting period, or the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol is the counting end condition. It may be the timing that is predetermined as, or it may be the timing that the predetermined operation is performed as the counting end condition.

The counting start condition and the counting end condition may be appropriately combined with the above-exemplified conditions. For example, a predetermined counting start time may be set as a counting start condition, a predetermined counting end time may be set as a counting end condition, and a winning random number counter related to the first special symbol is predetermined as a counting start condition. The timing may be set as the counting start condition, and the timing at which the timing (for example, 30 minutes) after which the predetermined counting period has elapsed may be set as the counting end condition.

Alternatively, after the power supply from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol (the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol or the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol). The timing at which the value is acquired at the Nth predetermined time (N is an integer of 1 or more) may be set as the counting start condition. Further, in that case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired at the Nth time. That is, the counting period may be different based on the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the Nth time predetermined. At this time, the counting start condition may be satisfied every time the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the Nth predetermined time is acquired.

As the "counting period" which is the determination standard of S1401, the predetermined counting valid period or the predetermined counting invalid period is used in the whole period during which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. It does not have to be one of the excluded periods or the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied during the entire period in which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, and these periods are any of them. May also be adopted.

Further, when the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied is adopted as the "counting period" which is the determination standard of S1401 among all the periods in which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. Does not require the predetermined period after a single type of counting start condition is satisfied to be the "predetermined period", but different types of counting start conditions (for example, a predetermined counting start time and a predetermined period). Each predetermined period after each determination of the counting start timing, etc.) may be the above-mentioned "counting period", or the predetermined period after the counting start condition combining different types of counting start conditions is satisfied is the above-mentioned "counting period". It may be configured as a "counting period".

If it is determined in S1222 that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), each process of S1401 to S1405 and S1501 to S1504, which will be described later, is not executed and returns to the main control interrupt process. If it is determined that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), the control may be started from the processing of S1501 and each processing of S1501 to S1504 may be executed before returning to the main control interrupt processing.

On the other hand, in S1222, when it is determined that the counting period is in progress (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected (S1402). Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10), the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to each of the switches 449A and 449B (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920). When is set, it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B has been detected.

When it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and the determination process S1404 is performed. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B has not been detected (S1402: N), the determination process S1404 is executed without executing the process of S1403.

Specifically, in S1403, when either the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A or the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B is set, the number of general winnings is set. Add "1" to the counter. On the other hand, when both the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A and the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B are set, "2" is added to the general winning number counter. do.

Since the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901 to the RAM provided with the general winning number counter, it is general even when the power supply of the drive voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped. The stored contents of the winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information of the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the general winning number counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

In S1404, it is determined whether or not the launch ball is detected. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10), the launch ball detection switch detection flag (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the launch ball detection switch 451 is set. If it is set, it is determined that the launch ball has been detected.

When it is determined that the launch ball is detected (S1404: Y), the launch ball number counter (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and the determination process S1501 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the launch ball is not detected (S1404: N), the determination process S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1405.

Specifically, in S1405, when the launch ball detection switch detection flag is set, "1" is added to the launch ball number counter. Since the firing ball number counter is provided in the RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the RAM can be operated by operating a predetermined switch (not shown) in the same manner as the general winning number counter described above. Unless the stored information is erased, the stored contents of the firing ball number counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

In S1501, it is determined whether or not the front block 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, the front block It is determined that 102 is in the open state.

When it is determined that the front block 102 is in the open state (S1501: Y), the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the firing ball number counter). Value) is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

That is, the closer the value calculated in S1502 is to the predetermined reference value as the value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is as designed, the more the nail 411 (more In detail, it is highly likely that the nails 411) provided at or near the entrance of the winning openings of the general winning devices 439A and 439B are in an appropriate state according to the settings at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. In the following description of the present embodiment, the "reference value" is the above-mentioned "reference value predetermined as a value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is as designed." Suppose there is.

On the other hand, as the value calculated in S1502 deviates from the reference value, the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is set from the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. There is a high possibility that it is in a deviant state. That is, the larger the difference, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the proper state.

The nail state level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The "nail state level" is such that the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B) is set with respect to the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. It is information that shows whether it is appropriate or inappropriate at a stepwise level. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the first range including the reference value (for example, a range having both ends of the reference value × ± 5%), the nail state level is appropriately the state of the nail 411. It is set to "1" indicating that.

On the other hand, when the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to a value larger than "1", so that the nail 411 is suitable. Indicates that it may be out of state. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the second range set outside the first range (for example, the range where the end on the side away from the reference value is the reference value × ± 10%). The nail state level is set to "2", and if it is outside the second range (that is, the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to "3". That is, the greater the deviation of the nail 411 from the appropriate state, the larger the value of the nail state level.

Next, the process of outputting the nail state level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, in S1505, a numerical value indicating the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) configured by the 7-segment display. For example, when the nail state level is "1", "1" is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. When it is determined in S1501 that the front block 102 is in the open state (S1501: N), each process of S1502 to S1504 is not executed, and the process returns to the main control interrupt process.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, in the nail state-related process S1222, the general winning number counter is updated (that is, the counting of the general winning number) is performed only during the predetermined counting period, so that the counting is performed by the general winning number counter. With respect to the number of general prizes and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general prizes counted in this way, unreasonable continuous input to the general prize devices 439A and 439B, illegal continuous input, averaging of numerical values, etc. It is possible to reduce the adverse effects of. As a result, the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

For example, when the pachinko machine 100 is inspected before shipment at the factory, the front block 102 is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and the main control is performed for the throwing. When it is inspected whether the device 370 or the like operates properly, the general winning devices 439A and 439B are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B with a probability extremely higher than the probability that the game ball will enter when the player plays a game. Become. If the entry of the game ball into the continuous general winning devices 439A and 439B is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed, the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately used. It may not be possible to determine performance.

Further, for example, a fraudster who visits a game hall (hall) in which a pachinko machine 100 is installed illegally opens the front block 102 and continuously throws a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. There is a possibility that it will end up. In this case, although the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed, it may be determined that the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is higher than the design value and is not as designed. There is sex. Here, the pachinko machine 100 detects the entry of a game ball at an improper timing in the big prize devices 433 and 434, which are not released unless a specific game state such as winning a big hit is reached, and an abnormal state is obtained. It is easy to control according to the above, but a winning slot where a game ball can always enter regardless of the game state, and a certain number of game balls are paid out without receiving a winning or losing lottery when the game ball enters. For a winning slot (general winning slot) to which a certain game value is given, it may be difficult to determine whether such an abnormal state has occurred or it is due to a normal game, and the winning slot is concerned. There is a possibility of fraud aimed at the mouth.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, it is possible to prevent adverse effects due to continuous injection into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, so that inspection before factory shipment and fraudulent acts by fraudsters can be performed. Even if done, the actual state of the nail 411 can be suitably reflected in the nail state level. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately evaluated based on the nail state level.

In addition, since the injustice on the game hall side is also suitably reflected in the nail state level, an outsider (for example, a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine) is injustice on the playground side based on the nail state level. Can be suitably detected.

For example, when a person concerned on the game hall side modifies the entrance of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and its vicinity to illegally change the state (the game ball is placed in the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B). An example is the case where the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is made inappropriate by modifying the nail 411 to the extent that it cannot enter at all), and such fraud is detected by an outsider in the game hall. After the amusement park is closed, the related persons on the amusement park side illegally throw the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, so that the performance of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is according to the design value. There is a possibility to adjust the numerical book tail to the performance. When the numerical book ends are matched in this way, the state of the nail 411 is appropriate even though the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is inappropriate. There is a high possibility that the nail condition level will be calculated.

On the other hand, during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state or the period in which the game ball may be continuously input to the general winning devices 439A and 439B. By excluding (that is, a predetermined period after an illegal continuous input of a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected) from the "counting period" of the criterion in S1401, the factory worker or Even if a person concerned on the game hall side continuously throws game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B for bookkeeping, the continuously thrown game balls can be excluded from the counting target by the general winning number counter. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown in during the inspection before shipment from the factory and the game balls thrown in illegally for the purpose of adjusting the balance from being reflected in the nail state level. The actual state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the mouth can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

That is, when a person concerned on the game hall side illegally throws a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, there is a possibility that the game ball is continuously thrown in in order to efficiently perform the illegal work. By excluding the predetermined period after the illegal continuous throwing of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is excluded from the "counting period" of the determination standard in S1401, the general winning device 439A is caused by the illegal continuous throwing. , The game ball that has entered 439B can be suitably excluded from the counting by the general winning number counter.

Further, as another example, in order to adjust the rate of entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B (easiness of entry of the game ball) on that day, the person concerned on the game hall side may use it before the store opens. , The state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B may be changed illegally. In this case, the entry ratio is adjusted to be higher than the design value on one day, and the entry ratio is adjusted to be lower than the design value on another day. It is averaged by accumulating for several days, so that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate even though the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is inappropriate. There is a possibility that the nail condition level will be calculated.

On the other hand, during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, it becomes difficult to average the numerical values by accumulation by limiting the period to a predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied. Thereby, the actual state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

Further, since the nail state level is calculated from the value obtained by dividing the general winning number by the firing winning number (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter), an outsider (for example, an inspection of a gaming machine) is inspected. The member of the engine) can suitably grasp the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B from the nail state level.

In particular, the count of the number of fired balls used to calculate the nail state level (that is, the update of the number of fired balls counter in S1405) is the count of the general prize number used to calculate the nail state level (update of the general prize number counter in S1403). ), Since it is performed only during the predetermined counting period, the value calculated in S1502 (the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of fired balls counter) can be used at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It can be obtained as a value that preferably reflects the actual state of the nail 411 provided in the vicinity thereof (more specifically, the state of the nail 411 in a predetermined period in which the general winning number is counted).

Further, since the calculated nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 on condition that the front block 102 is in the open state, the nail state level is set to the nail state when the player is not playing the game. It can be displayed on the level display device 474. Therefore, the player does not recognize that the information unrelated to the game such as the nail state level is displayed, and the player feels distrust of the game because the information unrelated to the game is displayed. Can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the nail state level displayed on the nail state level display device 474 is obtained by dividing the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter) into three stages. , An outsider (for example, a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine) determines whether or not the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is appropriate. It is easy to judge from the display contents of the level display device 474.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. The pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment has a setting changing function for setting the ball ejection rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the game ball. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 14 is a front view of the gaming board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The game board 400X is provided with a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a wind turbine 412, a central structure 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base 401, and the like, and the central structure 420 is provided with the same as the game board 400. The middle start winning device 2431 which is the starting device related to the first special symbol and the right which is the starting winning device related to the second special symbol arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420. The start winning device 2432, the lower large winning device 2434 arranged below the middle starting winning device 2431, and the upper large winning device 2433 arranged below the right starting winning device 2432, and the lower large General winning devices 2439A and 2439B arranged on the left and right sides of the winning device 2434 are provided.

The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned middle start winning device 2431 or the like (see FIG. 16), and to a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. It is said that the approach of the game ball can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431, a right start winning switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432, and a game ball that has entered the upper large winning device 2433. Upper prize winning switch 2443 for detecting, lower prize winning switch 2444 for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 2434, combination operation switch 445, start switch 446, and non-formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433. A non-specific passage switch 2447 that detects a game ball that has entered a specific passage (not shown), and a specific passage switch that detects a game ball that has entered a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433. 2448, general winning switches 449A, 449B and the like for detecting game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B are installed on the game board 400X.

Each winning device, specifically, the entrance portion of the game ball of the middle starting winning device 2431, the right starting winning device 2432, the upper large winning device 2433, the lower large winning device 2434 and the general winning devices 2439A, 2439B constitutes a winning opening. Then, the game ball that has entered each winning opening is guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided on the most downstream side portion of the game area.

A launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 16) is provided in the collection / discharge passage. The launch ball detection switch 451 is composed of, for example, a pass-through type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls fired in the game area, and a signal corresponding to this number of game balls is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 as an external terminal board. It is output via 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The game ball whose passage is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 in the collection / discharge passage passes through the discharge port provided in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is provided from the pachinko machine 100 to the game ball circulation device in the game hall. It is discharged (not shown). When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

The right start winning device 2432 according to the second special symbol has a right entry control mechanism 2452 and a right entry control mechanism that change the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by shifting between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16) that drives 2452. The right entry control mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry control solenoid 2462, and when the right entry control mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). The game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 2432 by taking the arrangement, but when the right entry control mechanism 2452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game is played by taking an arrangement in which the movable piece guides the game ball into the entrance. The ball will be able to enter the right start winning device 2432. The right entry control mechanism 2452 enters the right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 2462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper prize winning device 2433 has an upper entry control mechanism 2453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism. The game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 2433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage by the transition between the upper entry control solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 16) that changes the posture of the mechanism 2453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 16) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the upper entrance control mechanism 2453 of the upper prize winning device 2433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 2433 because the upper entrance regulation mechanism 2453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the upper approach control mechanism 2453 is in the approach allowable posture, the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 2433 by opening the entrance of the upper approach control mechanism 2453. Further, the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 2433 is guided to the non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture in which it is immersed backward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a privilege (for example, probability change). (Game state) is given.

As shown in FIG. 14, the lower prize winning device 2434 has a lower entry control mechanism 2454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism. A lower entry control solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 16) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 2454 is provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 2454 is in the no-entry posture, the lower entry control mechanism 2454 closes the entrance (winning opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the lower grand prize winning device 2434, but the lower entry control mechanism 2454. When the player is in the admissible posture, the lower entry control mechanism 2454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 2434.

A game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 2434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 is won. Or, a lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the right-starting winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-starting winning switch 2442 (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won. If so, at least one of the upper entry restricting solenoid 2464 and the lower entry restricting solenoid 2464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the upper approach control mechanism 2453 and the lower approach control mechanism 2454 takes an approach allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowable posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 2453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. It returns to the non-induction posture according to the stop of the solenoid 2465.

Further, on the game board 400X, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 16) composed of a 7-segment display can be visually recognized in a state where the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103 (see FIG. 16). For example, it is provided in the upper left corner portion of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or difficult to see from the player, and cannot be seen by the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example,). , A position that overlaps the back side of the front block 102 and is separated from the light-transmitting visual recognition portion of the central panel 220).

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the upper prize winning device 2433) during the special gaming state that shifts based on the winning. The game state that shifts after the special game state differs depending on whether or not it is. When the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state (that is, the game state which is the time-saving state and the low probability state). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game shifts to the probabilistic game state (that is, the game state in which the time is shortened and the probability is high).

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration may further include a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states, or a configuration may be configured in which the gaming states are shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operation of the main device of the game board 400X will be described generally in chronological order. When the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol in various gaming states is detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 (see FIG. 16), the first special symbol is started. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started in the same manner as the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol on the game board 400.

When the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the first special symbol, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the first special symbol on the game board 400. Similarly, the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) corresponding to the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery is determined based on the acquired jackpot symbol random number.

After the first special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected, as in the case of the game board 400. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started in the same manner as in the game board 400. It is continued, and as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbols related to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the upper entry control mechanism 2453 of the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower entry control mechanism 2454 of the lower prize winning device 2434 are in the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big prize switches 2443 and 2444 during each approach allowable posture in the upper approach control mechanism 2453 and the lower approach control mechanism 2454, or a predetermined maximum. When the permissible approach time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the upper entry control mechanism 2453 or the lower approach control mechanism 2454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the upper entry control mechanism 2453 or the lower entry control mechanism 2454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The upper approach control mechanism 2453 or the lower approach control mechanism 2454 is configured so that only one of them takes an approach allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first permissible posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and then a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the start winning of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the gaming state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game related to the normal symbol is performed in the same manner as in the game board 400, and when the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry of the right start winning device 2432 is restricted after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. The mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once. Specifically, when winning in a non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 2432 allows entry over a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probabilistic gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 2432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right approach control mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, a winner must be won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start winning device 2432 in the entry allowable state of the right starting winning device 2432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowable state of the right-starting winning device 2432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time-saving state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the short-time game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends. Therefore, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state. Further, since the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15, a back setting switch 905 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The rear setting switch 905 is set to enable the setting operation for setting the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages or 9 stages). It is a pachinko machine.

By inserting a predetermined key (not shown) into the rear setting switch 905 and rotating it to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated clockwise by approximately 90 ° from the initial position), the setting of the ball ejection rate can be changed. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the setting change of the ball ejection rate is enabled, the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed, the predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is set according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode). (Winning probability), probability change continuation rate (in this embodiment, probability of entering the probability change game state from the normal game state (probability change inrush rate), and the special game state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability change game state). It is possible to select one of nine types of gaming modes in which the combination with (including the probability of transitioning to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state) is different when shifting to. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball ejection rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special so as to have the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage. The ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type having a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate and the middle type having a medium initial hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate. You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly high probability of first hit but a significantly low probability of continuation of change. Further, in each of these types, the first-hit probability of each type is subdivided into smaller widths than the range of the first-hit probabilities between the types (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states), that is, Among the three stages, the first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability, the second-stage probability with the second lowest first-hit probability, and the third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432 is smaller than that of the other types, but the prize balls associated with winning the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 2434. The number is higher than the other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432 is larger than that of the other types, but it is associated with winning the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 2434. The number of prize balls is less than other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to judge from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the playability of guessing the setting of which type is made for a long time. Can be added.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margins for the players are set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game field can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability change continuation rate as described above, and for example, the first hit probability and the probability change. It may be one of the continuation rates. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability change continuation rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The probability that a small hit will be selected, the probability variation inrush rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation game state that has shifted after the special game state. May be the probability of ending (for example, the probability that the end of the probabilistic gaming state is selected in the fall lottery performed each time the change display of the symbol is executed during the probabilistic gaming state). It may be a combination of two or more of.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the setting change of the ball ejection rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by "1", the second-stage probability is represented by "2", and the third-stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the game mode of the first stage probability of the top type is "T1", and the game mode of the game mode of the third stage probability of the middle type. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom type second stage probability game mode is "B2".

FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903.

The signal relay unit 903 relays the on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). In the main control board 920, the game mode is allowed to be changed according to the reception of the setting signal in the ON state from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a main process (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 17) of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process started when the main control board 920 recovers from the power failure state, similar to the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, a portion different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, after the start-up standby processing S1003, the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply / firing control board 900 Judgment process S2001 is performed.

Specifically, when the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S1005: Y), information on substantially the entire area of the RAM. The RAM clear process S2002 for erasing is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a predetermined plurality of stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear processing S2002 erases the information in substantially all the areas except the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, the setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

Next, the setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Is predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM as the setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, the setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is the setting display device. Displayed at 906.

Therefore, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by making the middle start winning device 2431 win the game ball. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won by the middle start winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various information other than the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly set in the RAM. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, it is confirmed that the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, the set command output process S2006 that outputs a set command indicating that the RAM setting is completed to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to the normal game processing by receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, and also recognizes which game mode the main control board 920 operates in. can.

After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed. Further, after the start-up standby process S1003, if the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S1005: N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is periodically (the present embodiment) like the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. Then, it is a process executed by interrupting the main process (at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)).

Hereinafter, a part different from the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, as one of the processes executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207: N). , The setting suggestion information-related process S2021 described later with reference to FIG. 19 is executed after the nail state-related process S1222.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion information related process S2021. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 is a process of outputting the setting suggestion information when the condition set as the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied.

Here, the "setting suggestion information" is a plurality of stages (that is, setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) that is preset so that the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) can be set. In the present embodiment, it is information suggesting which of the nine types of game modes), and may be information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is, or is set. Only a part of the correspondence information (for example, only the type) may be identifiable information, and the selection rate is set to be different depending on which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is. It may be information that the player can guess the setting in, for example, different information is set according to the type of setting correspondence information, for example, among the numbers 1 to 9, if it is the top type, it is a large value. Is selected with high probability, and if it is a middle type, the value of "5" in the middle is selected most, and if it is a bottom type, it is harder to select a number that is larger or smaller than the middle "5". The smaller the value, the higher the probability that the setting will be selected, and although it is not clear which type it is, the number as the setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1601 for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503 of the nail state-related process S1222 (see FIG. 13) is performed. conduct. Specifically, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is "2" or higher. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the general winning number counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B.

When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level (S1601: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt processing. In the process of S1606, specifically, control data for displaying the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on a predetermined display unit is set. The predetermined display unit may be a symbol display device such as a decorative symbol display device 479, or may be a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

For example, when the setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative symbol display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub-control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. In response to the reception of the command, the sub-control board 940 causes the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, the right corner).

The setting suggestion information displayed and output by the processing of S1606 may be a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state, which is the same as the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906. It may be a character indicating each game mode, a numerical value, a symbol, a figure, a color, a text, etc. indicating each game mode, or a sensuous expression such as "may be a high probability setting!" It may be a text to indicate, or it may be a figure or the like in which each game mode can be identified by a bar graph or the like.

Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is not limited to the information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is, and which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is. Information that can be guessed by the player, for example, information that the player can guess the setting by setting so that at least a part of the selection rate is different depending on which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is. There may be. For example, if the color is set in 10 levels of shade, the darker the color, the higher the probability of selection, and if it is the middle type, the intermediate color is selected most, and it may be darker or lighter than the intermediate color. The color is harder to select, and if it is a bottom type, the lighter the color, the higher the probability of selection.Although it is not clear which type it is, the color as setting suggestion information can be confirmed and guessed. It may be information suggesting at least one of the type and the probability setting state, such as, and in this case, it may be a plurality of types of characters having different selection rates for each type or each character, not limited to the color, and is predetermined. The type of the character corresponds to the type, and the size of the character may change according to the probability setting state.

Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured by a part of the variable display executed by the special symbol lottery, or the setting suggestive information may be displayed depending on the type of the symbol in the variable display. Often, for example, the more advantageous the probability setting for the player as the probability setting state, the easier it is to select a specific symbol (for example, the symbol including the number "7"), or the number "1" to "9" is included. It may be easy to select a symbol containing a large number among the symbols. Here, the number of times the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to one, and the process of S1606 is repeated a plurality of times depending on the satisfaction of the output condition of the setting suggestion information once, so that a plurality of setting suggestion information is output. For example, the information may be output a plurality of times (for example, twice) determined each time by satisfying the output condition of the setting suggestion information once, or the number of times of output may be different by the lottery. Well, or the number of times may be different depending on the situation of the game at the stage when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure the setting so that the number of times the setting suggestion information is displayed increases as the player continues firing without stopping the firing. For example, the execution of the variable display is suspended. As the number of times increases, the number of times the setting suggestion information is output may be increased, or the number of times the start prize is further generated in the situation where the execution of the variable display is suspended up to the upper limit is counted and the number of times is dealt with. Then, as the number of times concerned increases, the number of times the setting suggestion information is displayed may increase.

The output of the setting suggestion information executed by the process of S1606 does not necessarily have to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and is a specific audio output from the audio devices 281,282 (for example, an output in other situations). A high-pitched "cue" sound that is not emitted), specific light emission by the board light emitting device 490 or frame light emitting device 271-275 (for example, iridescent light emission that does not emit in other situations), or at least partly in other situations. The light emitting portion that is constantly emitted may be turned off for a certain period of time or longer. In such a case, the light emission or extinguishing of the light by the board surface light emitting device 490 is used to turn off the board surface of the game board 400X for about several seconds (for example, about 1 second) at the timing when the game ball is launched by the launching device 330, and then emit light again. By doing so, a so-called "delayed effect" may be performed.

The output of the setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 does not necessarily have to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and is an audio output from the audio devices 281,282, a board surface light emitting device 490, and a frame light emitting device. It may be the emission of light by 271 to 275. Further, in the processing of S1606, the establishment of other conditions such as determining whether or not to output the setting suggestion information may be a condition for outputting the setting suggestion information, and a predetermined probability when the processing of S1606 is executed. (For example, the setting suggestion information may be output with a probability of about 1/10).

In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, the determination process S1602 for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1602, the setting is suggested when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B. It is determined that the information output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1602: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

Further, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1603 for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the generation interval of the start winning (starting condition) is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1603, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the predetermined gaming period (for example, during the firing operation period in which the gaming ball is launched from the launching device 330 in the normal gaming state). Even if a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the start winning of the game (that is, the winning of the game ball to the middle starting winning device 2431 or the right starting winning device 2432) is generated, a new starting prize is created. When a situation occurs in which the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not satisfied, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the start winning generation interval (S1603: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

The generation interval of the start prize (that is, the elapsed time from the last generated start prize) is measured by using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of a start prize for each special symbol. (For example, the hold command) reception timing interval is measured as the start winning generation interval. Alternatively, a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 may be used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning prize, and the measurement result may be transmitted to the sub control board 940.

In the determination process S1603, even if a predetermined period elapses after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied during the predetermined game period, a new special symbol is used. Output condition of setting suggestion information when the situation where the start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within 1 hour after the situation first occurs). May be determined to hold. Alternatively, during the predetermined game period, the situation in which the start condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied even after the predetermined period elapses after the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied is at least once within the predetermined monitoring period. Setting suggestion when the cumulative total of the period that occurs and the start condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied after the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period. It may be determined that the information output condition is satisfied. In addition, the number of times a new special symbol start condition is satisfied after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied. The output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied many times in a short period of time, such as determining that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the occurrence occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). Then, it may be determined.

As described above, in the determination processes S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information related process S2021, a predetermined winning device (for example, general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, middle) provided on the game board 400X is used as an output condition of the setting suggestion information. With respect to various predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432), it is determined whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the process of S1606.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, in the setting suggestion information related process S2021, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special gaming state is satisfied in the special gaming state (S1604: Y). Process S1605 is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1605, when a ball overflow signal indicating that the game ball is excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 during the special game state, the setting suggestion information is received. It is determined that the output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

Here, in the special gaming state, in order for the game balls to be excessively stored in the storage unit 241 from the ball overflow switch 249, the ball removal operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball removal operation member 242, and the discharge port 241B is not performed. The closed situation must continue for a certain period of time or more, and it is possible to select whether or not to perform this ball pulling operation at the player's will. Therefore, in a situation where the discharge port 241B is always open, the game knows that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied and the output of the ball overflow signal is the output condition of the setting suggestion information. It is possible to easily satisfy the output condition of the setting suggestion information only for the person. As a result, it is possible to add new playability such as giving indirect benefits that cannot be directly obtained to some players, and an operation different from the launch operation. It is possible to add a new playability in which the player acquires the setting suggestion information by using the unit.

In the determination process S1605, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper prize winning device 2433 or the lower prize winning device 2434 during the special gaming state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 8 in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round). Output of setting suggestion information when a single game ball enters the large winning device 2433, 2434) or when the number of continuations of the probabilistic game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the special game state. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied. In addition, as an operation that can be selected whether or not to be executed according to the player's will, a special gaming state in which the firing operation is stopped so that the gaming ball does not enter the grand prize devices 2433 and 2434 at all in a predetermined round. In a new game in which the player acquires setting suggestion information by performing a launch operation that loses the opportunity to acquire some prize balls, such as generating a start prize of the middle start prize device 2431 by performing a left-handed game method. Sex may be added.

Therefore, in the setting suggestion information related process S2021 described above, when the output conditions of various predetermined setting suggestion information are satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the process of S1606.

Since the nail state level is information indicating whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100 at a stepwise level, the value is "2". If it is more than or equal to, the nail 411 may be out of the proper state, which may be disadvantageous to the player.

Similarly, a new special symbol start condition even if a predetermined predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is generated. If a situation occurs in which is not established, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol start winning prize (that is, winning a game ball to the middle starting winning device 2431 or the right starting winning device 2432) such as the state of the nail 411. This may cause a disadvantage to the player.

On the other hand, in the determination process S1601 or the determination process S1603, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level or the start winning generation interval, and the setting suggestion information is set on condition that it is determined to be satisfied. By outputting It is possible to increase the material for determining the presence or absence of continuation so that the player can make a suitable judgment.

Further, in the general winning device 2439B, when a game is played by the right-handed gaming method in a special gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a probabilistic gaming state, a game that does not enter the right-start winning device 2432 or the upper-ranking winning device 2433. The ball enters. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general winning device 2439B, it is determined in the determination process S1602 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the condition is satisfied. In this case, even if the game ball does not enter the target right-starting winning device 2432 or the upper prize winning device 2433, the player can be given the pleasure of the game ball entering the general winning device 2439B.

In addition, receiving the ball overflow signal during the special gaming state indicates that a certain number of gaming balls have been acquired during the special gaming state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special game state, it is determined in the determination process S1605 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition of the establishment, so that the setting suggestion information is output during the special game state. Setting suggestion information can be given to the player as a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time (variable time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) in the special symbol related process S1217. ) Is configured to be selectable according to the currently set game mode.

Specifically, a lottery is won in which a preset game mode that can be set is assigned in advance to a plurality of selectable variable display times, and whether or not the variable display time is changed according to the game mode is drawn. If so, the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. Various variation patterns of the variation display time that can be selected for the game mode that can be set and predetermined are stored in advance as a table in the ROM of the main control board 920.

It should be noted that the variable display time may be allocated to two or more game modes, such as for each type of game mode, in a configuration in which the same variable display time is assigned to a game mode that is preset to be configurable. It is also possible to have a configuration in which different variable display times are assigned to each of the game modes of each predetermined stage.

Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set game mode is performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won. Or it may be configured to be performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery is not won.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, by selecting the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the variation display of the variation display time according to the currently set game mode can be displayed. Will be executed. Thereby, the player can infer (recognize) the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that the allocation of the variable display time to the configurable game mode is the most advantageous game mode among the configurable game modes of each stage (for example, the third stage probability of each type). The long variable display time may be easily selected from the various variable display times that can be selected for the game mode that is configurable in advance. By lengthening the variable display time for the advantageous game mode, the player plays the game while paying attention to the length of the variable display time of the decorative symbol, and the most advantageous game mode is set. Can be expected.

Further, the configuration may be such that a longer variable display time is allocated as the advantage of the game mode determined in advance so as to be configurable is higher. Thereby, the player can infer the advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set gaming mode is displayed and output, so that the player can visually recognize the setting suggestion information. It is possible to suitably recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the ball ejection rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the game ball.

Further, since the variation pattern of the variation display time according to the currently set game mode is selected, the player prefers the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variation display of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the arrangement position of some devices in the flow path on the right side of the gaming area and a part of the specifications in each gaming state are different from those of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. ing.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, like the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, has a setting change function for setting a game mode such as a jackpot probability and a probability change continuation rate, and is provided as a small hit privilege. The maximum admissible time for entering the right-handed winning device 1434 to be opened is configured to differ depending on the game mode changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (C). 20 (A) is a front view showing a right side portion of the game board 400A in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 20 (B) is a partially enlarged view of the right start winning device 1432. 20 (C) is a cross-sectional view of the right start winning device 1432 in line AA of FIG. 20 (B).

In addition, in FIG. 20A, the schematic outline of the main structure provided in the game area is shown. In FIGS. 20 (A) and 20 (B), the right start winning device 1432 and the right large winning device 1434 are both shown as schematic cross-sectional views in which the front plate portion is cut off, and the cross-sectional views thereof. The hatching of the cross section is omitted in. In FIG. 20B, the protrusions 1538 provided on the front wall surface constituting the ball passage portion 1611 are shown by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 20A, the protrusions 1537 and 1538 are shown. It is omitted.

Further, in FIG. 20 (A), the state in which the approach control mechanism 1452 and the approach control mechanism 1454 are both in the entry prohibited posture is shown by a solid line, while in FIG. 20 (B), the approach control mechanism 1452 enters. The state of the allowable posture is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIGS. 20A and 20B, for reference, a part of the game ball flowing down the game board 400A is shown, and a part of the flow path of the game ball is shown by an arrow. .. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 20C, hatching of the cross section is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A), the game board 400A has a right-start winning device 1432 arranged below the starting device 436 and a right-start winning device 1432 on the left side with respect to the right-start winning device 1432, as a configuration characteristic of the present embodiment. It is equipped with an arranged right-handed prize-winning device 1434.

The right-starting winning device 1432 is a winning device that functions as a starting winning device according to the second special symbol, similar to the right-starting winning device 2432, and is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 can reach. There is. The right start winning device 1432 drives the entry control mechanism 1452 and the entry control mechanism 1452 that change the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with an entry control solenoid (not shown), which is a solenoid similar to the solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 will be described as "entry control solenoid 1462" for convenience.

The entry control mechanism 1452 includes a movable piece driven by the entry control solenoid 1462. When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the movable piece is arranged to project forward so as to close the entrance (winning opening) of the right start winning device 1432, and the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture. If this is the case, the movable piece is arranged so as to immerse in the rear so as to open the entrance (winning opening) of the right-starting winning device 1432.

As a result, when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 1432, but when the approach control mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball wins the right start prize. You will be able to enter the device 1432. The approach control mechanism 1452 receives a predetermined number of times according to the drive by the approach control solenoid 1462 when the game ball that has entered the start device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by the normal symbol lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446. And, it shifts to the approach allowable posture only for a predetermined time. In addition, when the entry control mechanism 1452 shifts to the entry allowance posture based on winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the specified number (for example, 10) allowed for one entry allowance posture in the entry control mechanism 1452. When the game ball of is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right approach control mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum approach allowable time, and the number of shifts to the approach allowable posture is Even if the predetermined number of times has not been reached, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

When the approach control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper surface of the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452 constitutes a downwardly downward inclined surface in front view of the gaming machine. As for the descending inclined surface, the inclination of the descending inclined surface downward to the left is preferably a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane, and is set to, for example, 5 degrees.

The right-start winning device 1432 opens upward with respect to the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452, which is in the entry-prohibited posture, and enters from the entrance of the right-starting winning device 1432. The first flow passage portion 1532A through which the game ball can pass and the portion downstream from the first flow passage portion 1532A on the descending inclined surface are opened upward and entered from the entrance of the right start winning device 1432. It is provided with a second flow passage portion 1532B through which the game ball can pass.

The first flow passage portion 1532A is configured as a passage having a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one. On the downstream side of the first flow passage portion 1532A, a right start prize switch 1442A similar to the right start prize switch 2442 is provided as a detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first flow passage portion 1532A. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right-start winning switch 1442A has, as shown by a alternate long and short dash line in FIG. It is arranged so as to substantially coincide with the substantially center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the above view.

Further, the right-starting winning switch 1442A is at an intersection with the upper end of the right-starting winning switch 1442A in a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the substantially center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the right-starting winning switch 1442B, and in an entry prohibited posture. Arranged at a position where the distance L1 (see FIG. 20B) between the intersection with the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of a certain entry control mechanism 1452 is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Will be done. That is, the first flow passage portion 1532A is a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the substantially center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B, and the first flow passage portion 1532A is the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 which is the entry prohibition posture. The distance L1 between the intersection and the intersection with the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A is configured to have a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

It should be noted that the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452, which is a game ball whose center is arranged on a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the substantially center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B and is in an entry prohibition posture. The distance from the contact point between the game ball in contact with the lower surface (that is, the game ball P) and the lower surface of the movable piece to the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A may be set as the distance L1.

Alternatively, from the contact point between the game ball in contact with both the passage wall of the first flow passage portion 1532A and the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 which is the entry prohibition posture, and the lower surface of the movable piece, the right start winning switch 1442A The longest distance to the upper end of the distance may be the distance L1.

The "distance from the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A to the upper end of the right starting winning switch 1442A from the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the approach restricting mechanism 1452 which is the entry prohibition posture" is the right starting winning prize. It may be the distance from the upper end of the device constituting the switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452, and from the upper end of the detection position in the right start winning switch 1442A, the entry control mechanism. It may be the distance to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of 1452.

Further, the "length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball" does not necessarily have to match the diameter of the game ball, and may be at least 1 times the diameter of the game ball, but is 1.5 of the diameter. The length is preferably not more than double, and the one closer to the diameter of the game ball is preferable because the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 1432 can be detected quickly.

Further, by arranging the right start winning switch 1442A at a position where the distance L1 is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first flow passage portion 1532A is within the detection range by the right starting winning switch 1442A. Even when the approach restricting mechanism 1452 shifts from the approach permitting posture to the approach prohibiting posture immediately after entering, the game ball is suppressed from coming into contact with the movable piece of the approach restricting mechanism 1452. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a change in the behavior of the game ball due to contact with the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452, chattering in which the game ball already detected by the right start winning switch 1442A is erroneously detected again by the right start winning switch 1442A. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of problems such as the occurrence of.

The arrangement position of the right start winning switch 1442A is the longest distance L1 from the upper end of the right starting winning switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 which is the entry prohibition posture. However, the length is not limited to substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, and may be a position shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Even in this case, the entry of the game ball into the right-start winning device 1432 can be quickly detected.

As shown in FIG. 20B, the first flow passage portion 1532A gradually approaches the diameter of the game ball on the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A and as the passage width approaches the right starting winning switch 1442A. It has a smaller section (hereinafter, this section is also referred to as a "gradual change section"). In the gradual change section, the passage width at the end position of the gradual change section is preferably a width equal to or larger than the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A, and is substantially equal to the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A. Is preferable. Further, the gradual change section may be provided in the entire area or almost the entire area on the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A, or may be provided in a part of the area upstream of the right starting winning switch 1442A.

The opening of the second flow passage portion 1532B is wider than the opening of the entrance portion of the first flow passage portion 1532A, and is configured to be wide enough to allow a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time. On the upstream side, the second flow passage portion 1532B moves the gaming ball that has entered through the opening to the downstream side (in the present embodiment, the left side in the front view of the gaming machine) on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452. It is configured as a passage through which the game balls collected on the upstream side are passed one by one on the downstream side.

On the downstream side of the passage portion where the game balls passing through the second flow passage portion 1532B can be passed one by one, a right start winning switch as a detection means capable of detecting the game balls passing through the second flow passage portion 1532B. A right start winning switch 1442B similar to 1442A is provided.

Regardless of whether the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right starting winning switch 1442B, the start winning of the second special symbol is generated. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 is subjected to the right start winning switch 1442A or the right starting winning switch 1442B depending on whether it passes through the first flow passage portion 1532A or the second flow passage portion 1532B. Detected, thereby generating a start prize for the second special symbol.

The game ball that has entered the first flow passage portion 1532A or the second flow passage portion 1532B is detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B, and then discharged from the respective flow passage portions 1532A and 1532B. It is guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the substrate 401.

Since the opening that becomes the entrance portion of the first flow passage portion 1532A is provided on the upstream side of the opening that becomes the entrance portion of the second flow passage portion 1532B, the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 is of the entry control mechanism 1452. In the configuration that reaches the upstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, when the approach restricting mechanism 1452 is in the approach allowable posture, the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 is mainly sent to the first flow passage portion 1532A. Can be entered.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20B, the opening serving as the entrance portion of the first flow passage portion 1532A is provided substantially directly below the starting device 436, and thus enters. When the regulating mechanism 1452 is in the approach allowable posture, most of the game balls that have passed through the starting device 436 can be made to enter the first flow passage portion 1532A.

When the approach control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452 moves the game ball along the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, as shown in FIG. 20 (A). It functions as a ball passage portion 1611 that guides from right to left in the front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the approach control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture and the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452, the game ball descends. It flows down the ball passage portion 1611 while rolling on the inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage portion 1611 reaches the downstream end of the descending inclined surface, it falls from the downstream end.

On the other hand, if the approach control mechanism 1452 shifts to the approach allowable posture while the game ball is passing through the ball passage portion 1611, it is located on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452. Depending on its position, the game ball enters the first flow passage portion 1532A or the second flow passage portion 1532B, or flows down on the guide portion 1531 extending in the lower left direction from the opening end of the second flow passage portion 1532B. .. When the game ball flowing down on the guiding portion 1531 reaches the downstream end of the guiding portion 1531, it falls from the downstream end.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20B and 20C, the rear wall surface 1535 and the front wall surface 1536 of the ball passage portion 1611 each project inward and are continuous in the vertical direction. And a protrusion 1538 is provided. As shown in FIG. 20C, in these projecting portions 1537 and 1538, the projecting portions 1538 are arranged between the adjacent projecting portions 1537 and the projecting portions 1537 are arranged between the adjacent projecting portions 1538 in the top view. Will be done.

Therefore, the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 travels from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right to the left side in FIG. 20C) while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the collision with the protrusions 1537 and 1538. .. As a result, the traveling speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 is reduced, so that the time (stay time) for the game ball to stay in the ball passage portion 1611 can be lengthened.

As a result, the right-starting winning device 1432 is suppressed from increasing the opening width in the passing direction of the game ball on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 at the entrance of the right-starting winning device 1432. While making it compact, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball flowing down the descending inclined surface can enter the entrance / exit of the right-start winning device 1432 at the timing when the entry control mechanism 1452 shifts to the next entry allowable posture. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, the protruding portion 1537A located on the most upstream side of the protruding portions 1537 and 1538 is provided at a position not overlapping the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A in the top view. Therefore, the game ball passing through the starting device 436 and heading toward the right starting winning device 1432 can enter the first flow passage portion 1532A before the meandering by the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is started.

The upper surface of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 is provided with a protruding portion protruding upward from the upper surface and a recessed portion recessed downward in the same arrangement as the protruding portions 1537 and 1538 to pass through the ball passage portion 1611. The game ball may be meandered to prolong the staying time.

The right grand prize device 1434 is a prize device that functions as a grand prize device similar to the lower grand prize device 2434, and is a descending inclined surface formed by a movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 or each downstream end of the guide portion 1531. It is provided in a position where the game ball dropped from the can reach. The right-handed prize-winning device 1434 is a lower entry control solenoid that drives an entry control mechanism 1454 and an entry control mechanism 1454 that regulate the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with an entry control solenoid (not shown) similar to the 2464 (see FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1454 will be described as "entry control solenoid 1464" for convenience.

The entry control mechanism 1454 comprises a movable piece driven by the entry control solenoid 1464. When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the movable piece is arranged so as to project forward so as to close the entrance (winning opening) of the right grand prize device 1434, and the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture. If this is the case, the movable piece is arranged so as to immerse in the rear so as to open the entrance (winning opening) of the right large winning device 1434. As a result, when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the game ball cannot enter the right big prize device 1434, but when the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball wins the right big prize. You will be able to enter device 1434.

A game ball can enter the right big prize device 1434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time according to the drive of the entry restriction solenoid 1464. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big prize switch 1444 in each entry allowable posture in the right big prize device 1434, or a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, for example). After 29.5 seconds), the entry control mechanism 1454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, the entry control mechanism 1454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The game ball that has entered the right grand prize device 1434 when the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the approach permissible posture passes through the ball passage portion formed in the right grand prize device 1434 and is located on the downstream side of the ball passage portion. It is detected by a large prize switch 1444 similar to the lower prize switch 2444 (see FIG. 16) arranged. The game ball that has entered the right prize-winning device 1434 is detected by the prize-winning switch 1444, and then guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401.

When the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper surface of the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1454 constitutes a downwardly downward inclined surface in front view of the gaming machine. The downward slope is preferably set to a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane, for example, 5 degrees.

When the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1454 moves the game ball along the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, as shown in FIG. 20 (A). It functions as a ball passage portion 1621 that guides from right to left in the front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452 or the game ball dropped from each downstream end of the guide portion 1531 is the entry control mechanism 1454. When the game ball reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the above, the game ball flows down the ball passage portion 1621 while rolling on the descending inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage portion 1621 reaches the downstream end of the ball passage portion 1621 in the right grand prize device 1434, the game ball falls from the end.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a lottery result of the unit game related to the second special symbol, a small hit is set in addition to the above-mentioned big hit. When a small hit is won, a privilege (small hit privilege) different from that when a big hit is won is given to the player. As one of the types of special gaming states that occur when a big hit is won, a special gaming state in which a privilege of the same size as the small hit is given may be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having the small hit function, the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right starting winning switch 1442B. The entry control solenoid 1462 is configured to operate when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery based on the above. When the value of the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol acquired based on the occurrence of the start winning of the second special symbol is a value that wins a predetermined small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit winning value). Will be a small hit. The small hit winning value is set to a value different from the big hit winning value, and it is set that the big hit and the small hit are not established at the same time in one start winning. In the unit game in which the small hit is won, the predetermined small hit symbol is the special symbol display device 471,472 among the symbols different from the big hit symbol (the lost symbol displayed when the big hit is not won). It is set as a stop symbol in.

If a small hit is won, the entry control solenoid 1464 is activated, the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, and the right big prize device 1434 is opened. The entry allowance posture of the entry control mechanism 1454 is such that a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are detected by the large prize switch 1444 in one small hit winning, or a predetermined maximum entry allowance time (for example, 5) is allowed. It is sustained (maintained) until the elapse of 3 seconds), and after the end of the period, the entry control mechanism 1454 returns to the no-entry posture. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum approach permissible time of the right large winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, is changed to a game mode changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate. It is configured to be different depending on.

During the period in which this permissible approach posture is maintained, it corresponds to the gaming state (small hit gaming state) related to the small hit. The small hit game state starts when the stop symbol corresponding to the winning of the small hit is displayed, and ends after the entry restriction solenoid 1464 returns to the entry prohibition posture. As for the small hit game state, as in the special game state corresponding to the big hit, the execution of the variable display is waited for, and after the small hit game state, the variable display related to the next unit game is performed.

The control of the small hit game state is performed in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won when there is a start prize for the second special symbol, and if a small hit is won, the entry control solenoid 1464 is allowed to enter over the above period. In the posture, the right big prize device 1434 is opened. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the variable display stand by during the small hit game state, and the variable display of the next unit game may be started during the small hit game state.

The small hit is different from the big hit in that it does not trigger a change in the gaming state by one winning. If a small hit is won, the game proceeds according to the game state determined in the lottery before the previous time. For example, in the normal game state, the normal game state continues after the small hit game state, and in the probabilistic game state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hit game state, and the remaining unit game. The number is reduced by one.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the ball that can be acquired by the player by paying out the game ball in the probabilistic state C to E, which is a non-time saving state, as a game playability by a small hit. Since the number (hereinafter, also referred to as "the number of acquired balls") is gradually increased and the increase in the number of acquired balls is limited in the probabilistic states A and B, which are the time-saving states, the right-start winning device 1432 is used. The number of prize balls for winning is set to be small. That is, a large number of game balls will be won in the right start winning device 1432 in the probabilistic states A and B, and the number of prize balls is often set to a small number so that the number of acquired balls gradually decreases even in this situation. The number is preferably 2 or less, and is set to 1, for example.

Next, the game in the probabilistic game state of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming states are internally further classified into five types of internal gaming states. Hereinafter, each of these five types of internal gaming states is also referred to as "probability change state A", "probability change state B", "probability change state C", "probability change state D", and "probability change state E".

Probability change state A, probability change state B, probability change state C, probability change state D, and probability change state E each have a higher probability in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) than in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Although it is common in that the big hits are drawn by lottery, the selection mode of the effect in the decorative pattern display device 479 is different.

Specifically, in the probabilistic state A, one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns as the fluctuation pattern. In the probabilistic state B, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns as the fluctuation pattern. In the probability change state C, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns at a rate of 50%.

In the probabilistic state D, the loss pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern as in the probabilistic state A, and a lottery is made as to whether or not the transition to a specific mode display is possible. In the probabilistic state E, the loss pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern as in the probabilistic state A, and the process for ending the probabilistic game state is executed.

In a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920, a plurality of types (for example, 120 types) of transition patterns of five types of internal gaming states (that is, probability changing states A to E) in the probabilistic gaming state are prepared in advance. .. Each transition pattern is associated with a value that identifies the individual transition pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as "pattern number"), and is based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. By selecting the pattern number, the transition pattern is determined.

The pattern number is selected based on the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter. For example, when 120 types of transition patterns are prepared, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "359" when shifting from the special gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. Is also selected for each value from "1" to "120" as the pattern number, and when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "359", also for each value. , "1" to "120" are selected as the pattern numbers, respectively. This makes it possible to evenly select various transition patterns. In the time-saving game state (the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "239"), a transition pattern different from that in the probabilistic game state is selected.

Each of these plurality of types of transition patterns is set so that the timing at which the internal gaming state is switched in the probabilistic gaming state is different. Specifically, each transition pattern has different timings at which the probabilistic state B and the probabilistic state C occur among the probabilistic states A to E, and the length of the probabilistic state D following the occurrence of the probabilistic state C (that is, the probabilistic state). The number of occurrences of D) is different. When the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the main control board 920 determines one transition pattern from a plurality of types of transition patterns prepared in advance, and advances the game according to the determined transition pattern.

In addition, each transition pattern includes the number of executions of a unit game in which a change in the reach loss pattern occurs deterministically (hereinafter, also referred to as a "determined reach generation unit game") and a unit game in which the change in the reach loss pattern occurs selectively (hereinafter, also referred to as "determined reach generation unit game"). Hereinafter, the combination with the number of executions of (also referred to as "lottery reach generation unit game") is different. That is, for each transition pattern, the number of remaining unit games for designating the fixed reach generation unit game (hereinafter, also referred to as "fixed reach generation remaining unit game number") and the lottery reach generation unit game are specified. The combination with the remaining unit number of games (also referred to as "lottery reach generation remaining unit number of games" in the figure) is defined as a different combination.

In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the combination of the fixed reach generation remaining unit game number and the lottery reach generation remaining unit game number in each transition pattern is the fixed reach generation remaining unit game number and the lottery reach generation remaining unit game. The sum with the number is set to be a predetermined number of times (100 in this embodiment) predetermined as the basic number of executions of the probabilistic gaming state.

In the probabilistic game state, according to the determined transition pattern, the internal game state in the probabilistic game state is each unit game from the first unit game to the unit game immediately before the definite reach generation unit game. In the main control board 920, the main control board 920 executes the control according to the probabilistic state A, and the main control board 920 executes the control according to the probable change state B at the times when the definite reach generation unit game is executed.

Next, in each unit game from the unit game one time after the fixed reach generation unit game to the unit game one time before the lottery reach generation unit game, the main control board 920 is again used. The main control board 920 executes the control according to the probability change state C in the times when the control according to the probability change state A is executed and the lottery reach generation unit game is executed.

Next, from the unit game one time after the lottery reach generation unit game, the final round (100th in the present embodiment) in a predetermined number of times predetermined as the basic number of executions of the probabilistic game state. In each unit game up to the unit game immediately before the unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state D, and in the final unit game, the main control board 920 performs probability change. Control according to the state E is executed.

Even if the final unit game is executed, if the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol, the lottery reach generation unit game is executed every time the starting prize is generated. In the lottery reach generation unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state D.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured to switch between a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state according to the type of the probability-changing state (probability-changing states A to E) in the probability-changing gaming state. Specifically, the probabilistic state A and the probable change state B are in the time saving state, and the probable change state C, the probable change state D, and the probable change state B are in the non-time saving state. Details will be described later, but by configuring the configuration to switch between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state according to the type of the probability-changing state, in the probability-changing game state in which the game is played by the right-handed game method, the game balls in the probability-changing states A and B. Is difficult to enter the right big prize device 1434, and in the probabilistic state C to E, it is possible to generate a state in which the game ball easily enters the right big prize device 1434 by winning a small hit.

Next, the specifications regarding the ordinary symbol in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is preferable to set the specifications related to the ordinary symbol as follows. First, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is preferably set to a short time in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and is often set to about 1.0 second or less, and is about 0. It is preferable to set it to 5 seconds or less, for example, it is set to about 0.3 seconds in the non-time saving state and about 0.2 seconds in the time saving state. The distance between the starting device 436 and the right starting winning device 1432 is determined according to the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

When the normal symbol lottery is won, the time for opening the right start winning device 1432 (that is, the time for the entry control mechanism 1454 to take the entry allowable posture) is the firing time interval of the game ball (approximately 0. It is preferably set to a shorter time than 6 seconds), and for example, it is set to open once in a time of about 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-reduced state, it is preferable to set the time sufficiently longer than the firing time interval (about 0.6 seconds) of the game ball, for example, three times in a row with a time of about 1.8 seconds. It is set to open.

When the right start winning device 1432 is opened multiple times in a short time state, the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture during the interval time (that is, the time during which the entry control mechanism 1454 takes the entry prohibition posture) provided between each opening. The game ball that has reached the entrance portion of the right-starting winning device 1432 at a certain timing does not flow down to the downstream side of the entrance portion while the entry prohibition posture is maintained, and the approach regulation mechanism 1454 is next to enter the allowable posture. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right start winning device 1432 when it becomes. As a result, in the right start winning device 1432, the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowance posture so that the entry allowance time of about 5.4 seconds, which is equivalent to three times of about 1.8 seconds, is generated in the time saving state.

The interval time is preferably set to a time sufficiently shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, is often set to about half or less, and may be set to, for example, about 0.2 seconds. However, the configuration may be such that the posture is instantaneously switched to the no-entry posture in about 0.1 seconds or less. By setting the interval time to a time sufficiently shorter than the launch time interval of the game ball, the game ball is set to the right start winning device 1432 during the period when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the no-entry posture (that is, during the interval time). It is possible to prevent it from flowing down to the downstream side beyond the entrance portion.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in which the specifications related to the normal symbol are configured as described above, the game ball flowing down on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 is launched by the right-handed game method when the time is shortened. Most of them do not flow down to the downstream side of the right-starting winning device 1432, and most of them can enter the right-starting winning device 1432.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the downward inclination of the downward inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 is a gentle inclination angle (for example, about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane). In addition to being configured to have an inclination angle), protrusions 1537 and 1538 are provided in the ball passage portion 1611 so as to reduce the traveling speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611. It is possible to more preferably allow the game ball flowing down on the right side of the central structure 420 to enter the right start winning device 1432.

In addition, the specifications related to the normal symbol and the structure of the protrusions 1537 and 1538 are set so that approximately 90% or more of the game balls flowing down on the right side of the central structure 420 enter the right start winning device 1432. It is preferable that the probability of entering the right-start winning device 1432 is approximately 95% or more.

Here, the details of the contents of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100. In addition, in FIG. 21, the illustration regarding the time-saving gaming state is omitted.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the game is started, as shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko machine 100 is first started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the starting prize, and the game is executed in anticipation of winning a big hit.

When the right of the unit game is generated by the start winning, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the confirmation is stopped, and the jackpot lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol is performed. If you win, the game state shifts to the special game state. Whether or not a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is determined in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) that controls the unit game related to the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol and the small hit is won in the small hit lottery, the big prize device (specifically, the right big prize device 1434 and the lower big prize device 2434). ) Is operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) within a predetermined allowable approach time. The determination of whether or not a small hit has been won in the big hit lottery and the operation control of the big winning device are executed in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12).

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability is set to about 1/1 regardless of the gaming state, and is operated when the small hit is won. The permissible entry time of the grand prize device is set to 3 seconds or 5 seconds depending on the stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (changing the setting of the game mode) by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. ing.

In the special gaming state, for example, the operation of the big prize device (specifically, the right big prize device 1434 and the lower big prize device 2434) for about 30 seconds is performed a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 times or 16 times). Will be executed. If the type of jackpot selected in the normal gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is the normal jackpot, the game shifts to the normal gaming state via the time-saving gaming state. The determination of the type of jackpot is executed based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are a normal jackpot that shifts to a normal gaming state via a time-saving gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. There is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state via.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability that the normal jackpot is selected and the probability that the probability variable jackpot is selected when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol are the rear setting switch 905 and the probability that the probability variation jackpot is selected. It has a different configuration depending on the stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the initialization switch 907. For example, in the middle type, when a big hit is won in a big hit lottery of a unit game related to a special symbol. The probability that a normal jackpot will be selected is set to approximately 1/2, and the probability that a probabilistic jackpot will be selected is also set to approximately 1/2.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot selected in the normal gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is the probabilistic jackpot, the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the number of executions of the probabilistic gaming state is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times (specifically, 100) is set as the basic number of executions of the probabilistic game state as the number of remaining unit games. In addition, information corresponding to the probabilistic game state is stored in the game state storage unit (predetermined area of RAM) that stores the game state, lottery conditions related to the special symbol are set according to the information, and the normal symbol-related process S1218. The conditions for the normal symbol lottery in (see FIG. 12) and the transition time of the right start winning device 1432 to the entry allowable posture are also controlled according to the information stored in the game state storage unit.

In the probabilistic game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start prize (mainly the start prize related to the second special symbol) and the game is executed. Specifically, when the right to the unit game is generated by the start prize, the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the confirmation is stopped. The game state shifts to the state.

If the number of remaining unit games is "0" or more each time the special symbol is variablely displayed and then stopped, the number of remaining unit games is subtracted by one. When a big hit is won in the big hit lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the change display of the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. On the other hand, if the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol and the small hit is won in the small hit lottery, the big winning device (specifically) is the same as the case where the small hit is won in the normal game state. The right grand prize device 1434 and the lower grand prize device 2434) are operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) within a predetermined admissible time.

Next, specific specifications of the game in each game state will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram comparing the specifications of the games in each game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed game method and the variable display of the unit game by the second special symbol by the right-handed game method are simultaneously executed in parallel. When one of the variable displays is won, the other variable display is stopped at a non-winning (missing) symbol, and the transition to the special gaming state related to the winning of the one variable display is configured.

In FIG. 22, the frequency of selection of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the case where the jackpot is not won (the jackpot is not won) corresponding to each game state is selected in order from the highest frequency to "◎" and "○". , "△", "-" are shown in this order.

In the normal game state, the player is made to play the game by the left-handed game method, and in the right-handed game method, a long time (hereinafter, "long time 2") is continued for a time of 10 minutes or more so that the game does not progress. (Also referred to as) variation display is executed, and in this embodiment, a variation time of 1200 seconds to 1800 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method, and executes the game with the aim of winning the lottery related to the first special symbol.

In the probabilistic gaming state, the fluctuation time selected by the above-mentioned five probabilistic states A to E differs, and the short-time (approximately 0.5 seconds) fluctuation display occupies most of the probabilistic state A and the probabilistic state D. The other variable times are set to be rarely or rarely executed (for example, less than 1%) except in the case of a big hit. In the probabilistic states B and E, it is easy to select a variation display with a variation time of 60 to 90 seconds (hereinafter, also referred to as “long time 1”), which is longer than the probability variation states A and D. Here, in the probabilistic state B, the effect of losing reach accompanied by the appearance of a specific character is easily executed, and in the probable change state E, the end effect accompanied by a display or voice telling the player that the probabilistic state has ended is executed. To. Further, in the probability change state C, the short-time fluctuation display and the long-time 1 fluctuation display are executed at substantially the same ratio.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the probabilistic state A and the probable change state B are in the time saving state, and the probabilistic state C, the probable change state D, and the probable change state B are in the non-time saving state. It is configured. Further, as described above, the time for opening the right start winning device 1432 (permissible entry time) when the normal symbol lottery is won is set to be opened once in a time of about 0.5 seconds in the non-time saving state. In the time saving state, it is set to open three times in a row in a time of about 1.8 seconds.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the normal gaming state is set to a low probability, and the probability variation state is set to a higher probability than the normal gaming state. As a big hit privilege, in a normal game state, a game ball can enter the winning opening of the right big winning device 1434 or the lower big winning device 2434 for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds) (for a long time (for example). For example, the approach permissible postures of the approach control mechanisms 1454 and 2454 corresponding to the open state (about 30 seconds) continue, and in the probabilistic state, the setting is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). It is set to continue to be open for a long time.

The small hit probability is constant regardless of the gaming state, and is approximately 1/1 (that is, approximately 100% when the large hit lottery of the second special symbol is not won). The small hit privilege is set to a certain privilege in both the normal game state and the probable change state, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening of the right large winning device 1434 occurs for a predetermined opening time.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum permissible approach time specified for the right-handed prize-winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, is the exit ball by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The time is set according to the stage set by changing the rate setting (changing the setting of the game mode).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate, the first hit probability is significantly low, but the probability change continuation rate is significantly high. There are three types of game modes with different first hit probabilities, and three types of game modes with medium first hit probabilities and medium probability variation continuation rates with different first hit probabilities. , It is a bottom type game mode in which the probability of first hit is significantly low but the probability change continuation rate is significantly high, and one of nine types of game modes consisting of three types of game modes with different first hit probabilities can be selected. Will be done.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration, the maximum admissible time for entering the right-handed prize-winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, is set to either one of six game modes of top type or middle type. If it is set to, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and if any one of the three types of bottom type gaming modes is set, the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). For example, 5 seconds).

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment due to a small hit will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a game property by a small hit, an increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed (or in the probabilistic game state A and B, which is a time-saving state, in the probabilistic game state in which the game is played by the right-handed game technique. , The number of acquired balls gradually decreases), and in the probabilistic state C, the probable change state D, and the probable change state E, which are non-time saving states, the number of acquired balls is set to gradually increase. The "number of acquired balls" is the number of balls that the player can acquire by paying out the game balls, and is the number of balls fired into the game area from the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball in the winning device. It is the number of balls minus the number.

Specifically, in the probabilistic state A and B, which are the time-saving states, the game ball is more likely to enter the right-start winning device 2432 than in the normal game state. Therefore, in each of the unit games of the probabilistic states A and B, most of the game balls launched by the right-handed game method enter (win) the right-start winning device 2432, and therefore, the winning balls in the unit game. The numbers rarely increase or decrease gradually.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state C to E, which is the non-time saving state, the game ball is more likely to enter the right big winning device 1434 than in the normal game state. Therefore, in each unit game of the probabilistic state C to E, the game ball flows down to the downstream side (lower left side) from the right start winning device 1432 through the ball passage portion 1611, and the game ball enters the right large winning device 1434. Since (winning) will be won, the number of balls won will gradually increase in the unit game.

As described above, in each transition pattern, there are a plurality of unit games in the probability change state A, one unit game in the probability change state B, multiple unit games in the probability change state A, and one unit game in the probability change state C. It is stipulated that the unit game, the unit game in the probabilistic state D a plurality of times, and the unit game in the probabilistic state E once appear in this order. Therefore, the number of probabilistic states (probability-changing gaming states A and B) that are time-saving states constituting the first half of each transition pattern and the probability-changing states (probability-changing gaming states C to E) that are non-time-saving states constituting the second half. The number of acquired balls in the probabilistic gaming state can be significantly changed for each transition pattern according to the combination with the number of times. This makes it possible to provide the player with various playability based on the difference in the determined transition pattern.

Here, if a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winnings that are allowed to be won in the opening period occurs on average during the opening period of the right big winning device 1434 by one small hit winning, one time. The number of game balls given to a player as a payout privilege by winning a small hit (hereinafter, also referred to as a “payout privilege for one small hit”) is the number of game balls given to the player with respect to the predetermined number, to the right large prize device 1434. It is the number obtained by multiplying the number of prize balls (for example, 13) paid out by one winning (for example, 5 × 13 = 65). In this case, the number of acquired balls is approximately 6 which is obtained by adding the time of variable display and the time of opening the right big winning device 1434 from the number of game balls given to the player as a payout privilege for one small hit. It is a value obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls for about 10 balls fired per second (for example, 65-10 = 55 pieces).

However, the number of game balls that win the right big prize device 1434 in one small hit winning is not always a fixed number. For example, the entry control mechanism 1454 of the right big prize device 1434 is in the entry allowable posture. Later, the entry control mechanism 1454 may shift to the entry control posture due to the passage of the entry allowance time without winning a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls that are allowed to win, or the predetermined number. There is a possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number may be won or the game may fluctuate between the detection of the winning prize and the transition of the entry restricting mechanism 1454 to the approach restricting posture. However, in the following description, the number of game balls that win the right big winning device 1434 in one small hit winning will be simplified and described as a fixed number (for example, 5).

The number of balls acquired as a payout privilege for one small hit and the number of balls acquired in one special game state can be adjusted by the structure of the right big prize device 1434, the shape of the path through which the game balls flow, and the like. Is. Therefore, by actually measuring the number of various acquired balls, the shape of the structural part, the position of the switch, the duration of the allowable approach posture, the number of winnings for one small hit, etc. are determined so as to match the design value. It can be adjusted by changing it.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the increase in the number of acquired balls is restricted in the probabilistic states A and B, and the number of acquired balls is gradually increased in the probabilistic states C to E. The number of game balls that can be acquired as a privilege for a small hit in one small hit is the number of balls acquired as a payout privilege for one small hit, and the probability change states C to E included in the selected transition pattern. It is the number multiplied by the number of unit games.

Therefore, for example, when the number of unit games of the probabilistic state C to E included in the transition pattern is 31 times, the time when the unit game of the probabilistic state E is completed (that is, as the basic number of executions of the probabilistic game state) is predetermined. At the end of a predetermined number of unit games), the player has 31 units for the number of balls (for example, 55) acquired as a payout privilege for one small hit in the probabilistic game state. A number of game balls multiplied by the number of games (for example, 55 × 31 = approximately 1700) can be obtained.

On the other hand, the number of acquired balls in one special game state is the number corresponding to the continuous round determined based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter as the type of the special game state. In the special game state, the number of game balls that are basically paid out after the lapse of one round is the number of prize-winning game balls specified as a condition for the entry control mechanism 1454 to shift from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture in one round. It is the number (for example, 104) obtained by multiplying (for example, 8) by the number of prize balls (for example, 13) paid out by one winning to the right big winning device 1434.

However, the number of acquired balls in one special game state is restricted even though the number of winning balls of the game ball specified as a condition for the entry control mechanism 1454 to shift from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture is reached. Immediately before the mechanism 1454 shifts to the no-entry posture, the game ball wins the right grand prize device 1434, which causes a round in which more game balls are paid out, and the number of acquired balls is not necessarily constant. The number of balls acquired in one special game state is set to, for example, approximately 500 if the 6th round is won, and approximately 1500 if the 16th round is won, which is larger than that in the 6th round.

Therefore, when the internal gaming state transition pattern in the probabilistic gaming state is the transition pattern in which the number of unit games of the probabilistic changing states C to E is 31 times, as a payout privilege for a small hit in the probabilistic gaming state. The number of acquired balls of approximately 1700 is larger than the number of acquired balls in the special gaming state of 16 rounds.

In this way, the player does not have to win the jackpot in the probabilistic game state, but the probabilistic states C to E are executed after a certain number of unit games (that is, unit games of the probabilistic states A and B) are executed. You can get benefits for small hits in the unit game of. Therefore, the player does not merely generate the special gaming state, but the small hit winning continues until the time when the number of acquired balls starts to increase in the subsequent probabilistic gaming state (that is, the start of the unit game in the probabilistic state C). Play games in anticipation of.

Further, for example, when the number of unit games in the probabilistic state C to E included in the transition pattern is 67, which is more than the 31 times exemplified above, the game is played when the unit game in the probabilistic state E is completed. The person is the number obtained by multiplying the number of acquired balls (for example, 55) as a payout privilege for one small hit by the number of 67 unit games (for example, 55 × 67 = approximately 3700) in the probabilistic game state. You can get the game ball of. On the other hand, if the number of unit games in the probabilistic state C to E included in the transition pattern is 12 times, which is less than the 31 times exemplified above, the player will be at the point when the unit game in the probabilistic state E is completed. , In the probabilistic game state, the number of games obtained by multiplying the number of acquired balls (for example, 55) as a payout privilege for one small hit by the number of 12 unit games (for example, 55 × 12 = approximately 660). You can get a ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, it is possible to add a game property in which the number of acquired balls in the probabilistic game state fluctuates according to the selected transition pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the final unit game is executed in a predetermined number of times predetermined as the basic number of executions of the probabilistic game state, the unit game related to the special symbol is still executed. If the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery, the unit game of the probabilistic state D is executed every time the starting prize is generated. Therefore, the player can play the unit game of the probable change states A and B. After the end of the game, the number of balls won can be increased as long as the small hits are won.

Here, the maximum admissible time for entering the right large prize device 1434, which is released as a small hit privilege by winning a small hit, is set to a time shorter than the permissible entry time (approximately 5.4 seconds) in winning a normal symbol in a time-saving state. It is preferable to be done. With this setting, when the lottery related to the normal symbol is won and the entry control mechanism 1454 of the right start winning device 1432 takes the entry allowable posture in the time saving state, the maximum entry allowance of the right large winning device 1434 by the small hit winning It is possible to prevent the game ball, including the subsequent game ball, from reaching the side of the right big winning device 1434 located downstream of the right starting winning device 1432 for a certain period of time beyond the time.

As a result, the increase in the number of acquired balls can be limited in the probabilistic states A and B, which are the time-saving states, and the number of acquired balls can be increased in the probable change states C to E corresponding to the non-time-saving states. In, the situation of the number of acquired balls can be changed according to the length of the period until the number of acquired balls starts to increase (that is, the period from the first unit game to the start of the unit game in the probability change state C). .. Therefore, the number of acquired balls can be significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, whereby it is possible to provide the player with various playability due to the difference in the transition pattern.

Further, the permissible entry time (for example, about 5.4 seconds) in the winning of the normal symbol in the time saving state is the time until the game ball passing through the starting device 436 reaches the right starting winning device 1432 (for example, about 0). .3 seconds), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probability change state A (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and the maximum permissible time for entry in the small hit of the right big prize device 1434 (for example, about 3 seconds). It is more preferable to set the time longer than the added time, and this makes it possible to further make the playability in which the number of game balls acquired by the player increases due to the continuous small hits.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the probabilistic game state is started, first, the unit games of the probabilistic state A and B, which are in the time saving state, are executed a predetermined number of times specified by the transition pattern. After that, the unit games in the probabilistic states C to E corresponding to the non-time saving state are executed. The number of balls can be increased.

Here, a specific example of each stage of changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (changing the setting of the game mode) that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 will be described.

The first hit probability in the top type (that is, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability) is set to approximately 1/300, which is the same for all the first-stage probabilities to the third-stage probabilities, and the first-stage probability in the middle type is approximately 1. / 200, the first hit probability in the bottom type is set to about 1/100. It is not always necessary to set the jackpot probability at low probability differently for the top type, middle type, and bottom type, and the same probability should be included for any two or three or more types. It may be set to, or it may include a setting in which the jackpot probability is different in any two or three or more stages of the first stage to the third stage in each type.

The jackpot probability at the time of high probability in the top type (big hit probability in the probabilistic gaming state) is approximately 1/30 in the first-stage probability, approximately 1/40 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1 in the third-stage probability. It is / 50, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability in the middle type is about 1/20 in the first-order probability, about 1/25 in the second-stage probability, and about 1/30 in the third-stage probability. Yes, the jackpot probability at the time of high probability in the bottom type is set to about 1/10 in the first-order probability, about 1/14 in the second-stage probability, and about 1/18 in the third-stage probability. ..

The probability that a probable change jackpot will be selected (probability change continuation rate) is approximately 2/3 (approximately 66%) for the top type, approximately 1/2 (approximately 50%) for the middle type, and approximately 1/3 for the bottom type. (Approximately 33%) is set. It is not always necessary to set the probability variation continuation rate differently for the top type, middle type, and bottom type, and set it so that the same probability is included for any two or three or more types. Alternatively, it may include a setting in which the probability variation continuation rate is different in any two or three or more stages of the first stage to the third stage in each type.

Here, the probability that the probability variation jackpot ends (probability variation end rate) when the jackpot lottery is won in the probability variation game state can be expressed by a value obtained by subtracting the probability variation continuation rate from 1. In addition, when a start prize related to a special symbol occurs in the probabilistic gaming state, the probability that the probabilistic gaming state ends and transitions to the normal gaming state by the lottery related to the special symbol is the probability of a big hit at the time of high probability. Matches the value (probability) multiplied by. Hereinafter, this probability is also referred to as a probability variation game end probability.

The probability variation end probability is approximately 1/90, which is the value obtained by multiplying the jackpot probability (approximately 1/30) at the time of high probability by the probability variation end rate (approximately 1/3) in the first stage probability of the top type. .. By the same calculation, the probability variation game end probability in the top type is set to about 1/120 in the second stage probability and about 1/150 in the third stage probability. The probability of ending the probabilistic game in the middle type is set to approximately 1/40 in the first-order probability, approximately 1/50 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1/60 in the third-stage probability. The probability of ending the probabilistic game in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/15 in the first-order probability, approximately 1/21 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1/27 in the third-stage probability. This probability-changing game end probability corresponds to the expected value of the number of times a unit game continues to generate a small hit (that is, the number of times a start prize is generated) in the probability-changing game state, and the lower the probability-changing game end probability, the more the probability-changing game state. The number of unit games in is likely to increase.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the middle type having a probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/40 to 1/80 has a probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Since the number of unit games in the probabilistic game state tends to be larger than that in the bottom type, it is easy to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball by the small hit privilege in the probabilistic game state. Similarly, the top type with a probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/60 to 1/140 is a unit game in the probability variation game state than the middle type with a probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Since the number of times is likely to increase, it is easy to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball by the small hit privilege in the probabilistic game state.

Also, in each type, setting the 2nd stage probability rather than the 1st stage probability increases the number of unit games in the probabilistic game state and is more likely to benefit from the acquisition of the game ball by the small hit privilege, and the 2nd stage. The number of unit games in the probabilistic game state tends to be larger when the third stage probability is set than the probability.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a small hit is won as a probabilistic gaming state according to each stage of changing the setting of the ball ejection rate that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The entry control mechanism 1454 of the right grand prize device 1434 is controlled by the main control board 920 so that the number of times (expected value of the number of times) that the entry control mechanism 1454 operates continuously over a plurality of unit games is different, whereby the game ball by the small hit privilege It is said that the susceptibility to the benefits of acquisition is different. Therefore, it is possible to add a playability in which the setting is estimated by the number of unit games in the probabilistic game state.

The probabilistic game state may be set to continue until the next big hit occurs, or when a specified upper limit number of start prizes (for example, 200 times) is generated and a unit game is executed, the big hit is won. It may be set to end the probabilistic game state without it, and the upper limit of this specified number may be set differently for each type. For example, the top type may be set to 300 times, the middle type may be set to 200 times, and the bottom type may be set to 150 times. ..

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right-start winning device 1432 includes a plurality of flowing-down passage sections 1532A and 1532B as flow-down passage sections through which game balls that have entered from the entrance of the right-starting winning device 1432 can pass. Right-starting winning switches 1442A and 1442B capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the flow passage portions 1532A and 1532B are provided on each downstream side of the flow passage portions 1532A and 1532B. This makes it possible to detect the game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 1432 using a plurality of right-starting winning switches 1442A and 1442B, so that the game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 1432 can be efficiently detected. As a result, the time from when the game ball enters the right-start winning device 1432 to when it is detected by the right-starting winning switches 1442A and 1442B can be suitably suppressed.

Of the plurality of flow passage portions 1532A and 1532B, the first flow passage portion 1532A is started because the opening serving as the inlet portion thereof is provided on the upstream side of the opening serving as the inlet portion of the second flow passage portion 1532B. In a configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the device 436 reaches the upstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the approach control mechanism 1452, the game that has passed through the start device 436 when the approach control mechanism 1452 is in the approach allowable posture. The ball can mainly enter the first flow passage portion 1532A.

Here, in a configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 can mainly enter the first flow passage portion 1532A, the first flow passage portion 1532A is a movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 that is in an entry prohibition posture. Since the longest distance L1 among the distances of the upper ends of the right start winning switch 1442A from the lower surface is configured to have a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first flow passage portion 1532A is on the right. The time required for detection by the start winning switch 1442A can be suppressed to a short time. Even when the distance L1 is set to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first flow passage portion 1532A is the same as when the distance L1 is set to have a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball. However, the time required for detection by the right start winning switch 1442A can be suppressed to a short time.

Further, since the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is configured to have a passage width that allows the game balls to enter one by one, when the game ball flows down the first flow-down passage portion 1532A, the game ball with respect to the flow-down direction. It is possible to suppress the swinging in the crossing direction. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first flow passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the first flow passage portion 1532A, and at this point as well, after entering the first flow passage portion 1532A, the right start winning switch 1442A is used. The time required for detection can be reduced to a short time.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the last game ball, which is the specified number (for example, 5) allowed for one approach permissible posture in the approach control mechanism 1452, is the first flow passage portion. Since the time required from entering 1532A to being detected by the right-starting winning switch 1442A can be suitably shortened, the last game ball to be the specified number passes through the entrance of the right-starting winning device 1432. It is possible to suitably shorten the time required for the entry control mechanism 1452 to switch to the entry prohibition posture after entering the 1 flow passage portion 1532A and becoming a prize by detection by the right start winning switch 1442A.

As a result, among the game balls flowing down from the upstream side toward the right start winning device 1432, the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for one entry allowable posture in the approach control mechanism 1452, is the right start prize. When the device 1432 (more specifically, the first flow passage portion 1532A) is entered, the entry control mechanism 1452 is switched to the entry prohibition posture at an early stage from the approach, so that the entry control mechanism 1452 once. Suppresses that after the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for the allowed entry posture, enters the right start winning device 1432, the game balls exceeding the specified number enter the right start winning device 1432 and win a prize. can do.

In addition, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time (approximately 0.5 seconds), did the player enter the right-start winning device 1432 in the previous winning in the probabilistic gaming state in which the small hits are continuously won? , It may not be possible to determine whether or not the player has entered the right start winning device 1432 by winning a small hit thereafter. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for one approach permissible posture, quickly enters the right start winning device 1432. Since it can be detected by the right-start winning switch 1442A, it is possible to appropriately easily detect the game ball even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the game state in which the small hits are continuously won is set to a short time. Further, by making it easy to set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol short, it is possible to easily suppress the game ball from advancing to the downstream side of the right start winning device 1432 during the time-saving game state. By that amount, the right-start winning device 1432 can be easily miniaturized, and the degree of freedom in arranging the game area where the game ball flows down and the game parts such as the winning device and decorative parts can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first flow passage portion 1532A is located upstream of the right start winning switch 1442A, and the passage width approaches the diameter of the game ball as the passage width approaches the right starting winning switch 1442A. Since a gradual change section is provided in, the gaming ball flowing down the first flow passage portion 1532A is rectified in the flow direction as it goes down the gradual change section. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first flow passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the right start winning switch 1442A located on the downstream side of the gradual change section, so that the game ball flows down at the right start winning switch 1442A. It is possible to suppress word detection such as frequency detection.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum admissible time of the right-handed prize-winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, is controlled by the main control board 920 so as to be different depending on the type setting. Will be done. For example, when any one of the six types of game modes of the bottom type or the middle type is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and any one of the three types of game modes of the top type is set. When is set, it is set to a second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time.

Here, the top type game mode has a configuration in which the probability of first hit is significantly low but the probability change continuation rate is significantly high, so it is difficult to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball in a special game state, but a big hit lottery in a normal game state. Although it is difficult to win the game, once the normal game state is changed to the probability change game state via the special game state, the probability change game state is likely to be continued, and the player can use the right-handed game method in the probability change game state. It is easy to benefit from the acquisition of game balls by the small hit privilege by playing the game.

On the other hand, the bottom type game mode has a configuration in which the probability of first hit is significantly high but the probability change continuation rate is significantly low. Even if the probability change game state is not continued, it is easy to return to the normal game state, so the player is likely to benefit from the game ball acquisition by the special game state, but the game ball acquisition by the small hit privilege in the probability change game state. It is hard to benefit.

When the right big prize device 1434 is opened as a small hit privilege, the player, for example, stops the firing of the game ball and measures the opening period of the right big prize device 1434, so that the maximum entry allowable time is measured. , It is possible to determine whether it is the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or the second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time. Therefore, when the right big prize device 1434 is opened as a small hit privilege, the player can determine whether the maximum permissible approach time is the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time. It is possible to add a game property for guessing the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100.

As a result, for example, the player considers whether the gaming machine he / she is playing is a gaming machine suitable for his / her taste or a different gaming machine, and whether he / she continues the game with the current gaming machine. Since the inferred current gaming mode can be used as one of the selection factors such as whether to move to another gaming machine, it is possible to improve the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the gaming mode can be set in multiple stages. can.

Here, it is not always necessary to set the maximum admissible time of the right large prize device 1434 as a small hit privilege to be one time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds), and the length is determined by the lottery related to the start prize. The time set to two or more different types may be selected, and the probability of selecting the maximum allowable approach time differs depending on the type or the setting (step) in the type. It may be controlled by the main control board 920. For example, when any one of the three types of game modes that are the bottom type is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is easily selected (for example, 70%), and the first predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time. 2 It is difficult to select a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (for example, 30%), and it is difficult to select a first predetermined time when any of the three types of game modes, which are top types, is set. (For example, 30%), the setting is such that the second predetermined time is easily selected (for example, 70%), and in the middle type, both the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time are selected at approximately 50%. May be. As a result, it is possible to add playability in which the setting is estimated based on the selection rate of the maximum permissible approach time. In this case, as the first predetermined time, when a specified number (for example, 5) of game balls have entered, the time (for example, 3 seconds) for shifting to the no-entry posture before or almost at the same time as the maximum permissible entry time is reached. ) Is preferably set. When the player fires the game balls continuously, it is difficult or impossible to guess the setting of the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time, and the player temporarily makes it impossible to guess. By stopping the firing of the game ball, the player can recognize that it is the second predetermined time, and by doing so, the player can set it by performing an operation for positive setting determination. It is possible to add a new playability that can be guessed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when a time saving state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, the time saving state ends when the number of successful small hits (the number of small hit winnings) reaches a predetermined number of times. It differs from the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment in that it is configured.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment is configured as a pachinko machine whose internal gaming state changes in the probabilistic gaming state like the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and the time when the time saving state ends in the probabilistic gaming state is set. The display has been devised to inform the player. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, FIGS. 23 to 25 are explanatory views relating to the specifications of the game in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 24 is a diagram applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode of the symbol ratio in a special symbol, and the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the winning probability of the big hit in the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set to 1/100 in the low probability state and 1/10 in the high probability state. There is. Further, the winning probability of a small hit is set to 0 for the first special symbol and 1/5 for the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the winning probability shown in FIG. 23 is applied, even if the game ball is made to enter the middle start winning device 2431 (see FIG. 14), a small hit cannot be generated. By using the right-handed gaming technique, it is possible to generate a small hit by allowing the gaming ball to enter the right-start winning device 1432 (see FIG. 20). The winning probability of the small hit may be set to a value other than 0 for the first special symbol, or may be the same probability as the setting for the second special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is composed of three types of symbols according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the first special symbol of the present embodiment is a first big hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1") in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state. , The game state that shifts after the special game state is the probabilistic game state, and the second big hit symbol (hereinafter, "Special Figure 1_Specific time saving" is different from the first big hit symbol in the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function described later. It is also referred to as "design 2") and a third jackpot symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "special figure 1_normal time saving symbol") in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is the time saving gaming state.

The jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is also composed of three types of symbols according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the second special symbol of the present embodiment is the first jackpot symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1") in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. , The game state that shifts after the special game state is the probabilistic game state, and the second big hit symbol (hereinafter, "Special Figure 2_Specific time saving" is different from the first big hit symbol in the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function described later. It is also referred to as "design 2") and a third jackpot symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "special figure 2_normal time saving symbol") in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is the time saving gaming state.

The type of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol and the type of the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol are not limited to the above-mentioned three types, and may be an appropriate number of two or more. Further, the type of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol and the type of the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol do not have to be the same number, and the number of types of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol are not required. The number of types may be different. Further, at least one of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol may be configured not to include a symbol in which the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after the special gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is 40% for the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol and the special drawing 1_specific time saving. Symbol 1 is 30%, and special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 is 30%. In addition, the ratio of each jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is 40% for special figure 2_normal time saving symbol, 30% for special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, and special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2. It is said to be 30%. The proportions of the jackpot symbols in the first special symbol and the proportions of the jackpot symbols in the second special symbol are not limited to the above-mentioned proportions, and appropriate proportions can be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided for the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each small hit symbol in the second special symbol is the first small hit symbol (hereinafter, "special figure 2_small hit symbol 1"). (Also referred to as) is 70%, the second small hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2_small hit symbol 2”) is 20%, and the third small hit symbol (hereinafter, “special figure 2_small”) is set to 20%. (Also referred to as "hit symbol 3") is 30%.

In FIG. 24, regarding the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function corresponding to each jackpot symbol, “○” is attached to the function that operates after the special game state, and “×” is attached to the function that does not operate after the special game state. "Is attached. The "probability fluctuation function" is a function for setting the winning probability of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to a high probability state, and the "variation time shortening function" is a function for setting the first special symbol and the second. It is a function to set the variable display time of the special symbol and the normal symbol to a time different from the non-time reduction state and to make the time reduction state similar to that of the third embodiment.

That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the special figure 1_specific time-saving symbol 1, the special figure 1_specific time-saving symbol 2, the special figure 2_specific time-saving symbol 1, and the special figure 2_ that shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state. When the specific time saving symbol 2 is selected, both the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are activated after the special game state. On the other hand, when the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol and the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol that shift to the time saving gaming state after the special gaming state are selected, the fluctuation time shortening function is activated after the special gaming state, but the probability fluctuates. The function does not work.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the probability fluctuation function is activated after the special gaming state, the probability fluctuation function is applied until the next condition device is activated (until the next special gaming state occurs). Will be continued. Therefore, the high-probability state generated after the special gaming state by selecting the special figure 1_specific time-saving symbols 1 and 2 or the special figure 2_specific time-saving symbols 1 and 2 continues until the next special gaming state occurs. do. It should be noted that the conditional device is not a physical device but a conceptual device under the rules that manages the game machines in general, and the operation of the conditional device is triggered by the winning of the lottery related to the special symbol in the third embodiment. Corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated after the special gaming state, the fluctuation time shortening function is the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (the number of executions of the unit game related to the special symbol). Has reached a predetermined number of times, or the number of times a small hit by one of the three types of small hit symbols has been established has reached a predetermined number of times predetermined for the small hit symbol. It ends as.

As shown in FIG. 25, the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the number of times the small hits are established by each small hit symbol are the combinations of the symbols that the condition device operates. It is determined in advance according to the combination of the type of (big hit symbol selected by the special symbol lottery) and the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols (during the special gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 25, the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the number of times the small hits are established by each small hit symbol are the symbols that the condition device operates. Is associated with the combination of the combination of the above and the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, specifically, when the combination of the symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special drawing 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the symbol When the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination is a low probability state and a non-time saving state (that is, a normal gaming state), the operation of the special symbol display device 471, 472 which is the termination condition of the fluctuation time shortening function. The number of times, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 100 times, respectively. It is said to be 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state that has transitioned after the special gaming state transitions according to the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 according to the transition pattern as in the third embodiment. Internal game when any of the end conditions of the variable time shortening function preset for the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of times the small hit is established is satisfied. It is configured so that the state changes. That is, it is high when the end condition of the probability fluctuation function is not satisfied after the transition to the probabilistic game state and any of the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function set in a plurality of types is satisfied. The internal gaming state changes from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state while maintaining the probabilistic state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is based on the special figure 1_specific time-saving symbol 1, the special figure 2_specific time-saving symbol 1, the special figure 1_specific time-saving symbol 2, or the special figure 2_specific time-saving symbol 2. When the condition device is activated, when the end condition of the probability fluctuation function is not satisfied and the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function is satisfied after the operation of the condition device is completed (after the end of the special gaming state). , The internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state generated after the end of the special gaming state changes from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, as a game playability by a small hit, the number of acquired balls is obtained when the internal game state is a time saving state in the probabilistic game state. It is set that the increase of the number of balls is suppressed (or the number of balls acquired gradually decreases), and the number of balls acquired gradually increases in the non-time saving state.

When the combination of symbols to which the condition device is activated is special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is In the case of a low probability state and a time saving state (that is, a time saving gaming state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of establishments, the number of establishments of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of establishments of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 10, 10, 7, and 3 times, respectively. ..

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of times the small hit is established by FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 10 times, and 5 times, respectively.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a time saving state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the termination condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special figure. The number of times the small hit is established by the 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0 times, 0 times, 0 times, and 0 times, respectively.

Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1 is operated in the gaming state which is a high probability state and the time saving state, after the operation of the condition device is completed (special). (After the end of the gaming state), the variable time shortening function does not work when the operation of the condition device ends (the special gaming state ends), so that the probability change gaming state in the non-time saving state after the end of the special gaming state Is started.

Next, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol 1, when the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is operated. When the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-time saving state (that is, a normal gaming state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 The number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 30 times, and 10 times, respectively. It is said that.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a low probability state and a time saving state (that is, a time saving gaming state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the small hit symbol 1 according to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of successful hits, the number of successful small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of successful small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 70 times, 70 times, 70 times, and 70 times, respectively. ing.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of times the small hit is established by FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0 times, 0 times, 0 times, and 0 times, respectively.

Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol 1 operates in the gaming state which is a high probability state and the time saving state, the operation of the condition device ends (the operation of the condition device ends. Immediately after the special gaming state ends), the variable time shortening function ends, thereby transitioning to a gaming state (that is, a normal gaming state) that is a low-probability state and a non-time saving state.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of times the small hit is established by FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 100 times, 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times, respectively.

Next, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, when the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is operated. When the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-time saving state (that is, a normal gaming state), the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function are the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, and the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. Until the next conditional device operates regardless of the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 ( (Until the next special gaming state occurs).

Therefore, if the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the selection of the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special drawing 2_specific time saving symbol 2 is a low probability state and a non-time saving state, it is based on the symbol. The time saving state that occurs after the special gaming state continues until the next special gaming state occurs.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a low probability state and a time saving state (that is, a time saving gaming state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the small hit symbol 1 according to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1. The number of successful hits, the number of successful small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of successful small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 10, 10, 7, and 3, respectively. ing.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function are the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special. Regardless of the number of times the small hit is established by the small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3, until the next condition device is activated (that is, the special gaming state is next). Until it occurs).

Therefore, if the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the selection of the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special drawing 2_specific time saving symbol 2 is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, it is based on the symbol. The time saving state that occurs after the special gaming state continues until the next special gaming state occurs.

Further, when the combination of symbols to which the condition device is to be operated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high probability state and a time saving state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the termination condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and the special figure. The number of times the small hit is established by the 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of times the small hit is established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0 times, 0 times, 0 times, and 0 times, respectively.

Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1 is operated in the gaming state which is a high probability state and the time saving state, after the operation of the condition device is completed (that is, that is). , After the end of the special game state), the variable time shortening function ends immediately after the operation of the condition device ends (that is, the end of the special game state), whereby the probabilistic game generated after the end of the special game state ends. The internal gaming state of the state changes from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

The main control board 920 has a big hit symbol (special figure 1_specific time saving symbols 1 and 2, special figure 2_specific time saving symbols 1 and 2, special figure 1_normal) by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the time-saving symbol, special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol) is selected, the combination of the symbols and the condition based on the combination of the symbols is used as the end condition of the variable time shortening function according to the gaming state at the time of operation of the device. The number of operations of the set special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol (special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, special figure 2_small hit symbol 3) Is set as the remaining period in the remaining period counter (not shown) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM before the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function corresponding to the combination of the symbols.

The main control board 920 has a remaining period related to the special symbol display device 471, 472 every time the special symbol display device 471, 472 is operated (every time a unit game related to the special symbol is executed) after the end of the special game state. 1 is subtracted from the stored remaining period counter, and when the definite display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 is stored. Subtract 1 from the remaining period counter. Similarly, when the definite display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 is stored. When the definite display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 is stored.

Then, the main control board 920 has a remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, a remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, and a special figure 2_small hit symbol based on the contents of the remaining period counter after the update. When it is determined that either the remaining period related to 2 or the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 has reached zero, it is determined in the corresponding unit game that the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied. After the display is displayed, the variable time reduction function is terminated. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a configuration for notifying the player of the time when the time saving state ends in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. FIG. 26 is a screen view showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the gaming state in the high probability state and the time saving state.

In the game state of high probability state and time saving state (probability variation game state in which the internal gaming state is time saving state), as shown in FIG. 26, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are decorative symbols. It is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 together with 1731, 1732 and the like. The decorative symbol 1731 is a decorative symbol that is always displayed, and the decorative symbol 1732 that is displayed larger than the decorative symbol 1731 may be temporarily hidden in some situations such as when a predetermined effect is performed. It is a decorative pattern.

The remaining period display unit 1711 displays information corresponding to the remaining period for the execution period of the variable time shortening function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (in the present embodiment, the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472). The number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter that stores the remaining number of operations until the end condition of the above is reached is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 is set to a smaller value by 1 each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated. In the configuration in which the number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, it is not always displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated. There is no need to update the numbers to be reduced by one. For example, every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during at least a part of the period during which the variable time shortening function is being executed, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 is the predetermined number of times. The configuration may be such that the value is updated to a smaller value by the amount.

After the transition, the game state display unit 1712 is provided with information for notifying the player of the game state when a game state that is a high-probability state and a non-time saving state occurs due to the termination of the fluctuation time shortening function (hereinafter,). This information is also referred to as "game status information") is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the game state information is composed of the character string "PURFECT RUSH". The game state information does not necessarily have to be a character string, but may be a symbol, a pattern, or the like, or may be a combination of the character string and the symbol, the pattern, or the like.

When the variation time shortening function is completed, a predetermined effect display is performed using the game state display unit 1712 after the transition (for example, the decorative symbol 1732 is hidden and the transition is performed using the area where the decorative symbol 1732 is displayed. By displaying the rear game state display unit 1712 in a large size), the player can recognize that the game state, which is a high probability state and a non-time saving state, has occurred.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured to gradually increase as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to 26 (C), the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. As the number decreases (that is, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 becomes smaller), the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 increases. In this example, the sizes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 gradually increase as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that both display units 1711 and 1712 The amount of overlap increases.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are both on one side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (in the example shown in FIG. 26, the upper end side of the screen). Since it is arranged in, the player does not significantly move his / her line of sight to the change of each display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712, and the change of the overlap amount of the display units 1711 and 1712. It is possible to see without.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the visibility of the game state information (PURFECT RUSH) is improved as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. , The display mode of the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is configured to change with the change of the remaining period.

The change in the visibility of the game state information may be realized by changing the display mode of a predetermined image overlapping with the game state information, or the size and color of the game state information (for example, the background color). The configuration may be realized by changing the color difference) or the like. In FIG. 26, the change in the visibility of the game state information is shown by superimposing the hatching on the game state information.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times a small hit is established is adopted as the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function that has been activated after the special gaming state. It is possible to add a new playability that terminates the variable time shortening function according to the number of successful hits.

In particular, since multiple types of small hit symbols (types of small hits) are provided and the number of times small hits are established as the end condition of the variable time shortening function is provided for each type of small hit symbol, the variable time shortening function is terminated. The conditions can be diversified, thereby diversifying the playability of terminating the variable time shortening function according to the number of times a small hit is established.

In addition, the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol, which is the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function, is the type of symbol combination in which the condition device is activated and the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is activated. Since it is determined according to the combination with the game state, it is possible to diversify the conditions for terminating the variable time shortening function. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the game playability in which the variable time shortening function is terminated according to the number of times the small hit is established.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured to gradually increase as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. Will be done. Since the remaining period display unit 1711 displays a number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the player visually recognizes the change in the remaining period displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. By recognizing that the end time of the variable time shortening function is gradually approaching, and recognizing the increase in the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712, in the probabilistic gaming state. It is possible to be aware that the time for the internal gaming state to transition to the non-time saving state where the number of acquired balls can be expected to increase is approaching. As a result, when the internal gaming state in the probabilistic gaming state is the time-saving state, the player can preferably expect the arrival of the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time-saving state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display device 471, 472 is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, the special symbol display device 471, 472 is used. If the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of times the small hit by each small hit symbol is established before the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of operations, it is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. A non-time saving state occurs when the number is not zero. On the other hand, when the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of small hits by each small hit symbol before the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The remaining period display unit 1711 may display zero regardless of the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment described above, the probability fluctuation function activated after the special gaming state is configured to be continued until the next condition device is activated, but the fifth embodiment has a configuration. In the pachinko machine 100, when the number of small hit winnings (the number of successful small hits) reaches a predetermined number, the probability fluctuation function is terminated together with the fluctuation time shortening function. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state, the internal gaming state (probability change) according to the selected transition pattern. The states A to E) are configured to change.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a portion different from the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described.

In the probabilistic gaming state, after the large winning device is operated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined admissible time by winning the small hit in the small hit lottery, the internal gaming state is in a non-time saving state (in the present embodiment, the probabilistic state C). In the case of ~ E), if the number of successful small hits (the number of small hits won) reaches a predetermined upper limit number predetermined as an end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, the probability is high. Assuming that each end condition of the fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function is satisfied, the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function are terminated. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

The upper limit of the number of times a small hit is established, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, may be configured so that one type of upper limit is provided regardless of the type of the small hit symbol. Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, there may be a configuration in which an upper limit number of a plurality of types (for example, three types) is provided according to the type of the small hit symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times a small hit is established, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, corresponds to each transition pattern for each transition pattern of the probability variation states A to E. Value is set. The upper limit of the number of successful small hits, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, may be the same value common to a plurality of types of transition patterns.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times a small hit is established, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, is such that the internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state transitions to the non-time saving state. It is defined as the upper limit of the number of small hits that were established later. A counter (not shown) for counting the number of times a small hit is established is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the main control board 920 is not in the internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state. After transitioning to the time saving state, the counter is updated every time a small hit is won.

The upper limit of the number of times a small hit is established, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation shortening function, is set after the probabilistic gaming state according to the transition pattern starts (that is, the first probabilistic state A starts according to the transition pattern). It may be configured as the upper limit of the number of small hits that have been established (later).

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times a small hit is established is adopted as the end condition of the probability fluctuation function that has been activated after the special gaming state. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of generating a small hit gaming state, a small hit It is possible to add a new playability that terminates the probability fluctuation function according to the number of times that is established.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.
(1) Counting period In the above embodiment, the counting invalid period is provided after the continuous input of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, so that the general winning devices 439A and 439B are entered during the counting invalid period. The game balls that have been played are not counted as the number of general prizes. In this case, the game ball used for detecting the continuous input is counted as the general winning number by the general winning number counter, but when the continuous input is detected, the game used for such detection is performed from the general winning number counter. The value may be subtracted by the number of spheres.

In the above embodiment, some examples of the period that can be the "counting period" that is the determination criterion of S1401 are illustrated, but like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 may be used. When it is arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, instead of the above example, or in addition to the above example, the count start condition is that the normal game state is started, and the normal game state ends. The period until the above-mentioned "counting period" may be used.

Of the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the general winning device 439A arranged on the left side of the middle starting winning devices 431A and 431B can be entered (winned) only by the left-handed gaming method. A game ball can enter (win) the general winning device 439B arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning devices 431A and 431B by either the left-handed game method or the right-handed game method. Here, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, the player is on the right in the special gaming state. The game is played by the hitting game method. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general winning device 439B during the special gaming state, the number of general winnings counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state calculated based on the number of general winnings thus counted. The level may be a value that does not appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

On the other hand, by setting the start of the normal gaming state as the counting start condition and the period until the normal gaming state ends as the "counting period", the player entered the general winning device 439B during the special gaming state. It is possible to suitably exclude the game ball from the counting target. Therefore, the number of general prizes counted by the general prize counter and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general prizes counted in this way are displayed at or near the entrance of the prize openings of the general prize devices 439A and 439B. It is possible to accurately acquire the value as a value that appropriately reflects the state of the provided nail 411.

The start of the normal gaming state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating that the special gaming state is in progress is no longer output from the external terminal board 580, it can be determined that the normal gaming state has started.

Alternatively, when the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the special gaming state. It is unlikely that a left-handed gaming technique is being used. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the left-handed game method is performed based on the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, and the case where the left-handed game method is performed may be regarded as a normal gaming state.

In the above embodiment, the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state is exemplified as an example of the “counting invalid period”, but the period in which the front block 102 is in the closed state may be referred to as the “counting invalid period”. Further, when the front block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous throwing of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the "counting invalid period". When the front block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period is set as the "counting invalid period", for example, the game area. A ball jammed state in which the game ball is stagnant occurs in a part of the game ball, and the ball jammed state makes it impossible for the game ball to flow down in a part of the game area. When a situation occurs in which an entry occurs, the general winning number counter can be prevented from being updated for at least a part of the entry of these game balls. As a result, when the player keeps firing the game ball in a jammed state and illegally continuously enters the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the general winning number counter is updated by them. It is possible to correspond to the number of entry of the game ball excluding a part of the game ball of. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. In addition, even if a fraudulent act of illegally using a magnet to continuously enter the game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B is performed, the general prize number counter is updated for at least a part of the entry of the game balls. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from being used, and the performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be evaluated more appropriately.

(2) Value calculated in S1502 In the above embodiment, in S1502, the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter). ) Is calculated, but the value to be a divisor (divided) is not necessarily a value as long as the number of game balls launched from the launcher 330 into the game area increases as the number increases. It does not have to be a number (ie, the value counted by the launch ball count counter).

For example, during a predetermined period such as during the counting period or during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of times the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol is changed, the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, and the number of times the normal symbol is displayed. , The number of occurrences of the special gaming state may be adopted as a divisor of the value (divided number) of the general winning number counter. Alternatively, the number of game balls launched from the launching device 330 is counted, and the counted number of game balls or the number of game balls launched from the launching device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance from the counted number of game balls. The value obtained by subtracting the specified value may be adopted as a divisor from the value (divided number) of the general winning number counter.

(3) Nail state level calculated in S1503 In the above embodiment, the case where the nail state level is divided into three stages is illustrated, but the nail state level does not necessarily have to be divided into three stages. For example, the nail state level is divided into at least two stages, one indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate and the other indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state. May be good. Further, the nail state level may be divided into four or more stages.

In the above embodiment, the category indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state is subdivided into two categories, while the category indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is subdivided. Although the case where one division is used without any example is shown, the division indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate may be subdivided into two or more divisions.

In the above embodiment, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to "1", which is the minimum value, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail state level. Although it is configured to be large, the maximum value is the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the smaller the nail state level is. May be good.

In the above embodiment, the nail state level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter), but the nail is calculated from the value of the general winning number counter. It may be configured to calculate the state level. That is, the nail state level may be calculated without using the value of the number of shot balls counter.

(4) In the above embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on the condition that the front block 102 is in the open state, but the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on the front block 102. It may be configured to be performed regardless of the state of.

(5) Output destination of nail state level in S1504 In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed and output to the nail state level display device 474, but the output destination of the nail state level is not necessarily the nail state level display device. It does not have to be a display device such as 474. For example, the output destination of the nail state level is a management device (for example, a management device called a so-called "hall computer") or a portable terminal device, and in S1504, data indicating the nail state level is transmitted to the management device or the terminal device. It may be configured to be used. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level may be a printing device such as a printer, and in S1504, the print data indicating the nail state level may be output to the printing device, and the printing device may print the nail state level. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level is an audio output device such as a speaker, and in S1504, the audio data indicating the nail state level is output to the audio output device, and the audio indicating the nail state level is output from the audio output device. May be.

In the above embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 configured by the 7-segment display is exemplified as the output destination of the nail state level, but the nail state level display device 474 needs to be necessarily configured by the 7-segment display. There is no. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be composed of a display device capable of displaying various images, such as an LCD.

In the above embodiment, a display device (that is, a nail state level display device 474) that exclusively displays the nail state level is provided as an output destination of the nail state level, but the output destination of the nail state level is not always the same. It does not have to be a dedicated display device, and a display device used for other purposes may be configured to also function as a nail state level display device. For example, the decorative pattern display device 479 may be configured to display the nail state level.

Here, when the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, it is preferable that the display location of the nail state level is on the corner side of the decorative symbol display device 479. By displaying the nail state level on the corner side of the decorative pattern display device 479, the displayed nail state level can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the nail state level displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. Therefore, information unrelated to the game (that is, the nail state level) is displayed, and the player distrusts the game. It is possible to suitably suppress the feeling from being held by the player.

Further, when the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the nail state level may be displayed during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. As a result, a person who confirms the nail state level (for example, an outsider such as a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine) is able to perform a game by the player (that is, without opening the front block 102). Can be confirmed. Instead of displaying the nail state level on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is in the open state, the decorative symbol display device 479 at a predetermined time such as during execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. It may be configured to be displayed in.

In the above embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 is provided at a position where the front block 102 can be visually recognized when the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, but the installation position of the nail state level display device 474 is provided. Does not necessarily have to be the location exemplified above. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be provided at a position invisible to the player during the game (for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 100). That is, the nail state level display device 474 may be provided on either the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, or the sub control board 940 at a position visible from the back surface side of the intermediate block 103.

(6) Display content of nail state level displayed in S1504 In the above embodiment, the numerical value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, but the nail state level is shown. If it is information, the display content (output content) indicating the nail state level does not necessarily have to be a numerical value. For example, when the nail state level display device 474 is composed of, for example, an LCD, even if the nail state level calculated by S1503 is displayed as a numerical value, it is displayed with symbols, characters, figures, etc. corresponding to each numerical value. However, it may be displayed in the form of the number of figures such as circles and squares corresponding to each numerical value, and a bar code (for example, a two-dimensional bar code) indicating each numerical value.

In the above embodiment, the numerical value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, but the value calculated in S1502 is displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or an LCD. It may be configured to be used. That is, the configuration may omit the processing of S1503.

In the above embodiment, the numerical value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, but the numerical value calculated in S1503 or the value calculated in S1502 is a predetermined value. The information encrypted based on the calculation may be displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or an LCD. By displaying the encrypted information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the information unrelated to the game (that is, the nail state level, etc.) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from feeling distrust of the game.

The predetermined calculation may be performed by a fixed calculation formula, or may be periodically (for example, every hour) or at a predetermined timing (for example, a winning random number counter related to a special symbol becomes a predetermined value). The configuration may be performed by an arithmetic expression that is changed based on a predetermined pattern at (timing). It should be noted that the calculation formula is a person who confirms the encrypted information regardless of whether it is fixed or variable (for example, an outsider such as a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine). ) Is known to be decodable.

(7) Output time of nail state level In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed and output to the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is in the open state, but the display time of the nail state level is displayed. However, it is not always necessary that the front block 102 is in the open state. For example, the nail state level may be constantly displayed on the nail state level display device 474. Further, when the front block 102 is opened and a predetermined operation is input, the nail state level may be displayed on the nail state level display device 474. Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 100 receives an output request transmitted from a terminal device, a management device, or the like, the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, or the terminal device or management of the source of the output request is displayed. It may be configured to output data indicating the nail state level to a device or the like.

(8) In the above embodiment, a prize ball is given by entering the winning device to be counted, but a movable piece that is irrelevant to the big hit lottery and can change the entry probability is also provided. The configuration is limited to the general winning devices 439A and 439B, but the entrance is a winning device where a big hit lottery is performed by entering like the starting winning devices 431A, 431B, 432, and a movable piece whose entry probability can be changed. A right-starting winning device 432 or the like provided in the portion may be counted, and the nail state level may be calculated for each winning device.

Further, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B for detecting game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B are separately provided has been described, but the plurality of general winning devices 439A, The passage of the game ball that has entered 439B may be merged on the downstream side, and the number of general prizes may be counted by a common prize switch. Further, the winning switch used for counting the number of general prizes may be a switch used for paying out the prize balls, or may be provided separately from the switch used for paying out the prize balls.

Further, in the above embodiment, the general winning numbers are collectively counted for the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B, which detect the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively. The general prize number counter may be provided separately corresponding to the plurality of general prize switches 449A and 449B, and may be separately displayed for the plurality of general prize devices 439A and 439B as the number of general prizes and the nail state level. .. In this case, the winning switch for counting the number of winnings by the winning number counter allows the game ball to enter only by the specific gaming method (for example, the left-handed gaming method). A winning device (or a winning opening, for example, a general winning device 439A) and a winning device (or a winning opening, for example, a general winning device 439B) that allows a game ball to enter by another gaming method (for example, a right-handed gaming method). It is preferable to provide them separately from each other, and this is a value that appropriately reflects the arrangement state of the members that affect the flow of the game ball such as the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of each winning device or in the vicinity thereof. As a result, it is possible to accurately obtain the number of general prizes and the nail condition level.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration in which the general winning number is counted for one counting period and the nail state level is displayed has been described, but the general winning number is counted separately for a plurality of counting periods. May be. For example, a general prize number counter is provided separately for a plurality of game states (for example, a normal game state and a special game state), and the general prize number and the nail state level are set separately for each game state. It may be displayed in.

(9) In the above embodiment, the number of general winnings and the number of launched balls are counted by the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920), but during the counting period, the general winning device 439A, The number of gaming balls that have entered 439B and the number of balls launched during the counting period may be configured to be acquireable by the management device, and the nail state level may be calculated by the management device.

(10) In the above embodiment, the information regarding the nail state level such as the number of shot balls counter and the general winning number counter is necessary for the backup voltage to be supplied from the power supply unit 901 and to return to the game state before the power failure. Stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 that stores the stored information, and when the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the firing ball number counter and the general winning number counter. Although the case where is erased has been described, the method of erasing the stored contents may be different from the stored information. For example, even if the stored information of the RAM is deleted by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the values of the number of shot balls counter and the general winning number counter are not deleted, which is different from the case of deleting the stored information. It may be configured to be erased only when a specific operation of is performed. For example, when a predetermined switch is pressed for a certain period of time or longer, an erasing operation is executed by a predetermined communication device, or an erasing operation is executed with a predetermined key (for example, the main control board 920 can be rotated by a key operation). When a predetermined switch is provided), when a predetermined erasable operation is executed (for example, the storage information by the predetermined switch (not shown) is stored with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 of the front block 102 maximized. When the erase operation is executed), etc. are exemplified. Further, the information may be stored in a storage medium (for example, a flash memory or an IC chip) different from the storage information required for returning to the game state before the power failure, and the information may be stored for a longer period of time than the stored information. It is preferable to provide a storable storage medium on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the main control board 920) and store information on the nail state level such as the number of shot balls counter and the general winning number counter in the storage medium.

(11) Modification example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment In the above second embodiment, a switch (rear setting switch 905, initialization) provided on the pachinko machine 100 by a setting changer such as a game hall administrator. By operating the switch 907), the setting of the ball ejection rate is changed (that is, the setting of the game mode is changed). Instead of this, an external device (for example, a management device called a so-called "hall computer") or a portable terminal device (portable terminal device) capable of communicating with the pachinko machine 100 changes the game mode to the next game mode. A signal corresponding to the instruction or information indicating the game mode to be set may be input to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

In the second embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503. In the determination process S1601, it is also configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the value calculated in the process of S1502, that is, (the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of fired balls counter). good. Further, in the determination process S1601, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour).

Alternatively, when the variable display count of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the display count of the normal symbol, the occurrence count of the special gaming state, etc. are adopted as divisors from the value (divided number) of the general winning number counter. In addition, the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601.

Further, the number of game balls launched from the launching device 330 is counted, and the counted number of game balls or the number of game balls launched from the launching device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance from the counted number of game balls. When the value obtained by subtracting the specified value is adopted as a divisor to the value (divided number) of the general winning number counter, the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601 for the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor. It may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of is satisfied.

In the second embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is "2" or higher, but the nail state level is "1". It may be configured to determine that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the value indicates that the nail 411 is likely to be in an appropriate state, such as in the case.

In the second embodiment, the determination process S1602 determines whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. However, the general winning device 2439A , 2439B, or may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the winning device including the starting winning device such as the middle starting winning device 2431.

In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is provided. Although the configuration for determining that the output condition is satisfied is illustrated, the setting suggestion information is output when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls enters a predetermined general winning device. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied.

In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is provided. Although the configuration for determining that the output condition is satisfied is exemplified, the configuration may be configured to determine that the output condition for the setting suggestion information is satisfied regardless of whether the game ball enters the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B. .. That is, when the game ball enters any of a plurality of (two or more) winning devices determined in advance, the determination process S1601 determines whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. May be good. Further, even if the configuration is such that when the game ball enters both of a plurality of (two or more) winning devices determined in advance, the determination process S1601 determines whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. good.

Further, when the game balls enter the plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601. It may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of is satisfied. That is, when a plurality of predetermined winning devices are provided, not only the entry of the game ball into these plurality of winning devices but also the order of the entry is included as a requirement of the output condition of the setting suggestion information. good. As a result, the player can obtain the setting suggestion information as a privilege that the game balls are made to enter the plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game balls are made to enter the plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined predetermined order.

In the second embodiment, the case where the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied by an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute the game by the player's will during the special game state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information may be satisfied by another operation. For example, in a normal gaming state in which a player is advantageous by playing a game by a left-handed game method, the output condition of setting suggestion information is likely to be satisfied when a right-handed game method different from the left-handed game method is performed. In this case, for example, a game ball launched by a right-handed game technique such as a combination actuating device 435 can pass with a high probability (preferably about 50% or more, preferably about 70% or more). It is preferable that the area is such that the player can easily satisfy the output condition of the setting suggestion information, and the area where other functions are added and which is not used in the normal gaming state is the area where the game ball is used. It is preferable to set the output condition of the setting suggestion information to pass because it is possible to easily set the game ball so that the game ball can pass through the area with a high probability while suppressing the number of parts. Further, when a ball overflow signal indicating that the game ball is excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal game state, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the game ball rental operation is performed. Setting suggestion information by operating the ball pulling operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) and actively operating the ball overflow switch 249 so that the game ball is excessively stored in the storage unit 241. You may add the playability to acquire.

In the second embodiment, when it is determined in the setting suggestion information related process S2021 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process of any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the setting is made. Although the configuration is such that the output of the suggestion information is executed, some of the output conditions of the setting suggestion information are set individually in multiple judgment processes, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when all the conditions are satisfied. It may be configured so that the output of the setting suggestion information is executed. For example, the configuration may be such that the output of the setting suggestion information is executed when it is determined that the output conditions of the respective setting suggestion information are satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605.

In the second embodiment, the game mode in which the variable display time (variable time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) is currently set. However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period set within the period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The effect time of the predetermined suggestion effect to appear may be selectable according to the currently set game mode. The "suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests the degree (or degree of expectation) of the ease of transition to the special gaming state after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the second embodiment, when a lottery is won to determine whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode, the currently set game mode (that is, the main control board 920 at that time) is selected. The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display time assigned to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the game is selected, but a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change the fluctuation display time according to the game mode. When the game is won, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the variable display time assigned to the game mode currently set in the sub control board 940. It may be configured to select the fluctuation pattern of. Further, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to perform a lottery for determining whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode.

(12) Modification example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment In the above third embodiment, there are nine types of settings that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, and the probability variation end rate in each type. (Value obtained by subtracting the probability change continuation rate from 1) is the same value, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability (big hit probability in the probability variation gaming state) is different for each setting as the setting of the probability of 3 stages in each type. , The configuration in which the probability of ending the probabilistic game for each setting is different has been described as an example. Instead of this, the jackpot probability at the time of high probability in each of the nine types of settings may be the same value, and the probability variation end rate may be different for each setting, so that the probability variation game end probability for each setting may be different. By making the jackpot probability at the time of high probability different in each of the nine types of settings and making the probability variation end rate different in each of the nine types of settings, the probability variation game end probability may be different.

Further, in the third embodiment, the probability of ending the probabilistic game is different for each setting of the nine types of settings that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, but the probability of ending the probabilistic game is not necessarily the same. However, it is not necessary to make it different in all the settings, and it may be configured to include a setting having the same probability variation game end probability. For example, for each of the three stages of settings that belong to each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the jackpot probability and probability variation end at high probability in each setting so that the probability variation game end probability is the same value within the same type. It may be configured to set the rate.

In the third embodiment, the period from the first unit game in the probabilistic game state to the unit game of the previous round of the lottery reach generation unit game (that is, the unit game in the probabilistic state A and B is executed). The period) is configured to limit the increase in the number of balls acquired by winning a small hit, but it may be configured such that the number of balls acquired by winning a small hit increases from the first unit game in the probabilistic game state.

In a gaming machine having a configuration in which the number of balls acquired by winning a small hit increases from the first unit game in the probability-changing gaming state, the more the number of unit games that can be acquired by winning a small hit, the more balls won in the probability-changing gaming state. Since the number (number of small hit balls) increases, the lower the big hit probability (high probability) in the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the harder it is to win the big hit), the larger the number of small hits won, and the more the winning. The lower the probability of transitioning to the normal gaming state later (that is, the higher the probability change continuation rate), the larger the number of small hit balls can be obtained.

For this reason, if the top type with a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability change continuation rate is set by the setting change function, it is difficult to win the big hit lottery in the normal game state, but from the normal game state, Once the player shifts to the probabilistic game state via the special game state, the chances of acquiring the game ball by the small hit privilege in the unit game in the probabilistic game state can be increased, so that the number of acquired balls should be greatly increased. Is possible.

On the other hand, if the bottom type with a significantly high initial hit probability but a significantly low probability change continuation rate is set by the setting change function, it is easy to win the big hit lottery in the normal game state, but after that, it becomes the normal game state. Easy to return. It is difficult to acquire a game ball due to the small hit privilege in the probabilistic game state, and as a result, the number of acquired balls can be increased mainly by acquiring the game ball in the special game state.

For example, as the jackpot probability in the bottom type game mode, the low probability is 1/10 and the high probability is 1/5, while the low probability in the top type game mode is 1/100 and the high probability is 1/. It is set to 50, and the probability variation continuation rate is set to be common (for example, 1/2) regardless of the type.

In addition, the average number of balls acquired in one special game state is set to 10 regardless of the type such as top type or bottom type, while as a payout privilege for the transition to one probabilistic game state. When the average number of acquired balls is 40 in the bottom type and 490 in the top type, the expected value of the acquired number of balls for one initial hit (big hit in the normal gaming state) is 50 in the bottom type. (= 10 + 40), and 500 balls (= 10 + 490) in the top type. If the probability variation game state continues for two consecutive times on average, the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the bottom type is 100 balls (= 50 × 2), and the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the top type is 1000 balls (= 500 × 2). ).

Therefore, in such an example, the bottom type is set so that the first hit occurs with a probability of 1/10, but the expected value of the acquired number of balls is 100 balls. In addition, the top type has a probability of 1/100 that is lower than that of the bottom type, but the expected value of the number of acquired balls is 1000 balls, which is higher than that of the bottom type.

In other words, it is possible to create a specification that when the bottom type is set, it is easy to hit the game ball for the first time, but it is difficult to acquire the game ball, and when it is set to the top type, it is difficult to hit the game ball for the first time, but it is easy to acquire the game ball. .. In the above example, the top type has a probability of first hit 10 times that of the bottom type, and the number of acquired balls (balls) is 10 times. Therefore, both the top type and the bottom type have a ball ejection rate. It will be almost the same.

In the third embodiment, the protrusion 1537A located on the most upstream side of the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is provided at a position not overlapping the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A in the top view (FIG. FIG. 20 (C)), but the protrusion 1537 or the protrusion 1538 may be provided at a position overlapping the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A in the top view. By providing the protruding portion 1537 or the protruding portion 1538 at a position overlapping the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A in the top view, the game ball is changed in the course direction due to the collision with the protruding portions 1537 and 1538. 1 There may be a situation in which it is easy to enter the flow passage portion 1532A.

Regarding the positional relationship between the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A and the protrusions 1537 and 1538, the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A is meandered by the protrusions 1537 and 1538 in the front-rear direction. It is preferably located above the above position. The "position where the game ball is meandered in the front-rear direction by the protrusions 1537 and 1538" is a position before the game ball reaches the protrusions 1537 and 1538 as in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. Alternatively, the game ball may be in a position where the game ball is moved either forward or backward by the protrusions 1537, 1538.

In the third embodiment, the right-starting winning device 1432 includes two flowing-down passage portions 1532A and 1532B as a flowing-down passage portion through which a game ball entering from the entrance of the right-starting winning device 1432 can pass. However, if the first flow passage portion 1532A has the shape described in the third embodiment, the configuration may include three or more flow passage portions.

In the third embodiment, the maximum entry permissible time of the right big winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, has a different configuration depending on the game mode changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate, but it is small. A game in which the number of times the right big prize device 1434 is opened as a winning privilege and the interval time provided between each opening when the right big prize device 1434 is opened multiple times are changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate. It may be configured to be different depending on the embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the right grand prize device 1434 is configured not to have a specific passage and a non-specific passage like the upper grand prize device 2433 (see FIG. 14), but the right grand prize device 1434 is above. It is configured as a big prize device similar to the big prize device 2433, and when the game ball that has entered the right big prize device 1434 passes through a specific passage in the special game state, it is also configured to shift to the probabilistic game state after the special game state. good.

(13) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fourth Embodiment In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the number of operations of the special symbol display device 471, 472 which is an end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function. And the number of times the small hit is established by each small hit symbol is determined according to the combination of the type of the combination of the symbols on which the condition device is activated and the gaming state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols. However, it is a condition for ending the variable time shortening function depending on the type of symbol combination on which the condition device is to be operated or the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the symbol combination. The configuration may be such that the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of establishments of small hits by each small hit symbol are determined.

Alternatively, the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function, and the number of times the small hits are established by each small hit symbol are the types of combinations of symbols for which the condition device is activated and the symbols concerned. The configuration may be determined regardless of the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination of.

In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the next conditional device is included as one of the end conditions of the variable time shortening function, but the operation of the next conditional device is not included in the end condition of the variable time shortening function. May be. In addition to the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of times small hits are established by each small hit symbol, the fluctuation time reduction function is performed by adding the operation of the next condition device to the end condition of the fluctuation time reduction function. The conditions for terminating the above can be suitably diversified.

In the fourth embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided in the second special symbol, but the number of small hit symbols in the second special symbol is not limited to three types, but may be one or two. It may be 4 or more kinds.

In the fourth embodiment, the number of times a small hit is established (the number of times a small hit is won) is set as the end condition of the variable time shortening function, but the number of times the right big winning device 1434 is opened based on the small hit winning (the number of times the small hit is won). The configuration may be configured in which the number of times the approach control mechanism 1454 is in the permissible approach posture) is set as the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function.

In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period until the end of the variable time shortening function is set in the remaining period counter after the special gaming state and before the variable time shortening function is activated, and the special symbol display device 471, 472 is set. Each time the operation is performed, the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is subtracted by 1, but it is not always necessary to store the information corresponding to the remaining period by the information matching the remaining period, and the remaining period is supported. The value may be stored by the value set in the table or the like, or information that can calculate the remaining period may be stored. For example, every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of times the small hits are established by each small hit symbol are counted by a predetermined counter, and based on the value of the counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied.

In the configuration in which the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is counted by a predetermined counter as described above each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the main control board 920 is the special symbol display device. Each time the 471, 472 is activated, the storage content of the predetermined counter (the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are activated) and the special symbol display device 471, 472 set as the end condition of the fluctuation time shortening function. The remaining period until the end of the variable time shortening function may be calculated from the number of operations, and the calculated value of the remaining period may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM.

In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the gaming state in the high probability state and the time saving state, and the display units 1711 and 1712 are displayed. The mode and the amount of overlap of these display units 1711 and 1712 are configured to be changed according to the change in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, but such display is a gaming state in a high probability state and a time saving state. Not limited to this case, it may be displayed in various gaming states such as a gaming state in a low probability state and a time saving state.

In the fourth embodiment, the sizes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are gradually increased as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that both display units are displayed. Although the configuration is such that the overlap amount of 1711 and 1712 is increased, the overlap amount of both display units 1711 and 1712 is increased by increasing the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game status display unit 1712. It may be configured to make it.

Alternatively, the amount of overlap of both display units 1711 and 1712 is increased by moving at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 without changing the size of each display unit 1711, 1712. It may be configured, and the movement of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 and the change in the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712. Depending on the combination, the overlap amount of both display units 1711 and 1712 may be increased.

In a configuration in which the overlapping amount of both display units 1711 and 1712 is increased, as shown in FIG. 26, the display units 1711 and 1712 do not need to be separated from each other at the initial position, and both display units 1711 and 1712 do not need to be separated from each other. It may be configured to overlap each other at the initial position.

In the fourth embodiment, the overlapping amount of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 increases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that the transition time of the gaming state is set. Although the configuration is expected to arrive, the two display units 1711 and 1712 do not overlap, and the distance between them becomes shorter as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that the transition time of the gaming state is reached. It may be configured to expect the arrival.

In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are displayed on the upper end side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, but the display positions of these display units 1711 and 1712 are displayed. Is not limited to the upper end side of the screen, and may be any of the lower end side, the left end side, and the right end side.

In the fourth embodiment, the number corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol display device 471, 472 is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, but the remaining period of the special symbol display device 471, 472 is supported. The remaining period related to the establishment of the small hit by each small hit symbol may be displayed together with the number to be displayed or without displaying the number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

(14) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fifth Embodiment In the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, the number of times a small hit is established (the number of times a small hit is won) is set as an end condition of the probability fluctuation function. The number of times the right-handed prize-winning device 1434 is opened based on the small hit winning (the number of times that the entry control mechanism 1454 becomes the entry allowable posture) may be a condition for the transition to another gaming state, for example, the probability fluctuation function. It may be configured as an end condition, or when the number of successful small hits (number of small hit wins) in the normal gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition, the same special gaming state as the big hit win is generated. May be.

(15) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be in a special gaming state on condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
The game area (game area) where the game ball flows down,
A front side member (front block 102) having a visual recognition portion that makes the game area visible so that the front side of the game area can be opened and closed, and
A launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
An entry port (a winning opening of general winning devices 439A and 439B) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and
A game value-adding means (payout control board 930) that gives game value when a game ball enters the entrance, and
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) equipped with
The number of entries information (general winning number) updated in response to the entry of the game balls, excluding at least a part of the game balls that have been continuously thrown in by opening the front side member among the game balls that have entered the entry port. The entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the
Output means (nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the corresponding information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information. When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in the game area where the game ball flows down, the winning opening where the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, the passage leading the game ball to the winning opening, and the winning opening are not won. A large number of game nails are provided to form a passage leading to the out port. A large number of game nails are driven into and fixed to a game board forming the outer shape of the game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638).

However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, there may be a situation in which it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the counting value of the gaming ball that has won a prize in the winning opening.

That is, for example, when a game machine is inspected before shipment at a factory, a front side member provided so as to be able to open and close the front side of the game area is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening. Then, when it is inspected whether the control device operates properly with respect to the insertion, the game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening with a probability extremely higher than the probability that the game balls will enter when the player plays a game. The Rukoto. If the entry of the gaming ball into the continuous winning openings is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, the performance of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined. It may not be possible.

Further, for example, a fraudulent person who visits a game hall (hall) in which a game machine is installed illegally opens a front side member provided so as to be able to open and close the front side of the game area, and a game ball to a specific winning opening. There is a possibility that will be continuously input. In this case, although the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, there is a possibility that the winning of the gaming ball to the winning opening is higher than the design value and it is determined that the performance is not as designed. Here, the entry of the game ball at an irregular timing is detected by the control of the gaming machine at the winning opening, which is not opened unless a specific gaming state such as winning a big hit is reached, and the control corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. It is easy to do this, but there is a certain game value such as a winning slot where a game ball can always enter regardless of the game state, and a certain number of game balls are paid out without receiving a winning or losing lottery when the game ball enters. It may be difficult to determine whether such an abnormal condition has occurred or is due to a normal game for a winning slot (general winning slot) to which is given, and fraud aimed at the winning slot may be difficult. May be done.

In addition, for example, there is a possibility that the performance of the gaming machine may be changed to one that deviates from the design value. There is a possibility that the parties concerned will do it themselves. For example, by modifying the game hall so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance of a specific prize opening called a general winning opening at all, there is a possibility that the winning of the game ball to the winning opening can be suppressed below the design value. There is also.

In a game hall that commits such fraud, it is conceivable to take various measures so that the fraud is not detected by an outsider (for example, a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine). For example, in a situation where there is no outsider such as after the store is closed, the front door is opened and the game ball is illegally continuously thrown into the corresponding winning opening by the hands of a game hall employee, etc. There is a possibility to match the book tail. In this case, as long as the value after adjusting the book ends is confirmed, an outsider cannot detect the fraud on the playground side.

On the other hand, in the case of the game machine according to the feature 10, among the game balls that have entered the entrance, at least a part of the game balls that have entered the game ball that has been continuously thrown in by opening the front side member is excluded. The approach number information updated corresponding to the sphere is stored in the approach number storage means, and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means, or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the approach number information. Is output from the output means. Therefore, at least a part of the game balls continuously thrown in by opening the front side member can be excluded from the update of the approach number information. It is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed for the approach of the ball. For example, even if an employee of a game hall opens the front side member (front door) after the store is closed and illegally continuously throws a game ball into the entrance (winning opening). Since at least a part of such illegal continuous throwing is not counted as a game ball that has entered the entrance, it can be difficult for the game field side to make an illegal adjustment to the design value. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent concealment by the amusement park side, and an outsider can suitably detect fraud on the amusement park side.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 10, the "approach number information stored by the approach number storage means" is not necessarily the game ball excluding a part of the game balls continuously thrown "with the front side member open". It is not necessary to update in response to the approach, and a part of the game ball continuously thrown "with the front side member open" and the continuous entry "with the front side member closed". It may be updated in response to the entry of the game ball except for a part of the game ball. That is, as the description of the "entry number storage means" in the game machine according to the feature 10, "the entry of the game balls excluding at least a part of the game balls that have entered continuously among the game balls that have entered the entry port". The entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the entry number information (general winning number) updated in response to the above may be used. In this case, the front side member is opened. Not only does it prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of the entry of game balls that are continuously thrown into the entry slot, but it also illegally and continuously enters the entry slot with the front side member closed. It is possible to prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of the entry of the game ball.

For example, a ball jamming state in which a game ball stays in a part of the game area occurs, and the ball jamming state makes it impossible for the game ball to flow down in a part of the game area, so that the game ball is continuously connected to the entrance. It is possible to prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of the entry of these game balls when a situation occurs in which the player enters. As a result, when the player keeps firing the game balls in a jammed state and illegally continuously enters the game balls into the entrance, the entry number information is updated for those game balls. It is possible to correspond to the number of entry of game balls except for a part. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed. In addition, even if a fraudulent act of illegally using a magnet to continuously enter a game ball into the entrance is performed, the entry number information is not updated for at least a part of the entry of the game ball. It is possible to evaluate the performance of the gaming machine more appropriately.

In addition, "continuous" in "continuous throwing" and "continuous approach" includes the case where a predetermined number or more of game balls continuously enter the entry port within a predetermined time, and the game balls enter. In addition to the case where the game balls are continuous without any gaps, the case where the game balls enter the entrance at intervals is included.

<Feature 11>
The gaming machine according to feature 10.
Launch correspondence number information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) that stores launch correspondence number information (launch correspondence number) corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls launched in the game area increases. )
The output means is characterized in that the corresponding information corresponding to the ratio of the launch correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output. A game machine.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 11, the launch correspondence number information corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls fired in the game area increases is stored in the launch correspondence number information storage means. To. Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio between the launch correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value associated with the number of game balls that have entered the entrance and the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area is output from the output means as correspondence information. Therefore, it is easy for an outsider to grasp the state of the performance of the gaming machine from the corresponding information, and it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11.
It is equipped with a display means (nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying a design or predetermined information.
The output means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the front side member is opened, the approach number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output to the display means.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 12, the approach number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output to the display means when the front side member is opened. Therefore, information unrelated to the game (that is, entry number information or correspondence information) is not displayed on the display means during the player's game, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of distrust.

<Feature 13>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 10 to 12.
It is equipped with a substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variable display of symbols.
When the symbol is variablely displayed on the display means, the output means displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on the corner side of the display means. A featured gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 13, since the display output by the output means is displayed during the variable display of the symbol, the approach number information or the corresponding information is inconspicuous even if it is displayed during the game, and the player , It is difficult to recognize that information unrelated to the game (that is, entry number information or correspondence information) is displayed on the display means. On the other hand, an outsider such as a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine displays the number of entries information or the corresponding information displayed on the display means during the game by the player (more specifically, during the variable display of the symbol). You can check.

In particular, since the approach number information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, the player recognizes the approach number information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. It can be suitably suppressed. In addition, since the approach number information or the corresponding information that is displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the content that it means, and in that respect as well, the approach number information displayed on the display means. Alternatively, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from recognizing the corresponding information as information unrelated to the game.

<Feature 20>
The game area (game area) where the game ball flows down,
A front side member (front block 102) having a visual recognition portion that makes the game area visible so that the front side of the game area can be opened and closed, and
A launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
An entry port (a winning opening of general winning devices 439A and 439B) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and
A game value-adding means (payout control board 930) that gives game value when a game ball enters the entrance, and
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) equipped with
Stores entry number information (general winning number) that is updated in response to the entry of game balls that have entered during a predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among the game balls that have entered the entry opening. The entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) and
Output means (nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the corresponding information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information. When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in the game area where the game ball flows down, the winning opening where the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, the passage leading the game ball to the winning opening, and the winning opening are not won. A large number of game nails are provided to form a passage leading to the out port. A large number of game nails are driven into and fixed to a game board forming the outer shape of the game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638).

However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, there may be a situation in which it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the counting value of the gaming ball that has won a prize in the winning opening.

That is, for example, when a game machine is inspected before shipment at a factory, a front side member provided so as to be able to open and close the front side of the game area is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening. Then, when it is inspected whether the control device operates properly with respect to the insertion, the game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening with a probability extremely higher than the probability that the game balls will enter when the player plays a game. The Rukoto. If the entry of the gaming ball into the continuous winning openings is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, the performance of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined. It may not be possible.

In addition, for example, there is a possibility that the performance of the gaming machine may be changed to one that deviates from the design value. There is a possibility that the parties concerned will do it themselves. For example, by modifying the game hall so that the game ball cannot enter the entrance of a specific prize opening called a general winning opening at all, there is a possibility that the winning of the game ball to the winning opening can be suppressed below the design value. There is also. Alternatively, by frequently modifying whether the game hall side can prevent the game ball from entering the entrance of the winning opening at all before the store opens, or make it possible to enter, the winning opening on each day can be entered. There is also the possibility of adjusting the winning rate of the game ball (that is, the ease of winning).

As a countermeasure against such fraud, whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed by an outsider (for example, a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine) based on the counting value of the gaming ball won in the winning opening. It is conceivable to determine whether or not. In order to improve the accuracy of the determination based on the count value, it is preferable to use the count value obtained by accumulating several days instead of the count value for one day. However, when the winning ratio of the game ball to the winning opening is adjusted, the winning ratio is sometimes higher than the design value and sometimes the winning ratio is lower than the design value, so the count values for several days should be accumulated. As long as the count value is averaged in the above and the determination as to whether or not it is fraudulent is made based on the count value, there is a possibility that an outsider cannot detect the fraud on the playground side.

On the other hand, in the case of the game machine described in the feature 20, among the game balls that have entered the entrance, the game balls that have entered during the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied correspond to the entry of the game balls. The approach number information updated is stored in the approach number storage means, and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the approach number information is output from the output means. It is output. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed for the entry of the gaming ball into the entrance, by using the approach number information or the corresponding information. For example, a certain number of gaming balls that have entered the entrance after the gaming machine is manufactured can be excluded from the update of the entry number information. Further, even when the number of entries information for several days is accumulated, the number of entries information or the corresponding number information is difficult to be averaged, thereby preferably reflecting the fraud on the playground side. As a result, an outsider can suitably detect fraud on the playground side.

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20.
The launching means can launch a game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation unit (launching handle 252).
A lottery means (main control board 920) that draws lots based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
A special gaming state generating means (main control board 920) that generates a special gaming state that is an advantageous gaming state as compared with a normal gaming state based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means.
A specific entry ball provided in a game area in which a game ball can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined operation amount in the game area, and the game ball can enter while the special game state is occurring. Mouth (each winning mouth of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434),
The game state determination means (main control board 920) for determining whether or not the game is in the normal game state, and
When the game state determination means determines that the game is in the normal game state, the determination is used as the counting start condition, and the game ball that has entered during the predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied corresponds to the entry. The updating means (main control board 920) for updating the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 21, when the gaming state determination means determines that the gaming state is normal, the determination is used as the counting start condition, and during a predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the approach of the entered game ball, the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is updated. As a result, among the entrances, it is possible to accurately acquire the entry number information updated in response to the entry of the game ball that has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter only in the normal game state. Is possible.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21.
Launch correspondence number information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) that stores launch correspondence number information (launch correspondence number) corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls launched in the game area increases. )
The output means is characterized in that the corresponding information corresponding to the ratio of the launch correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output. A game machine.

In the game machine described in the feature 22, the launch correspondence number information corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls fired in the game area increases is stored in the launch correspondence number information storage means. To. Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio between the launch correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value associated with the number of game balls that have entered the entrance and the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area is output from the output means as correspondence information. Therefore, it is easy for an outsider to grasp the state of the performance of the gaming machine from the corresponding information, and it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 20 to 22.
It is equipped with a display means (nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying a design or predetermined information.
The output means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the front side member is opened, the approach number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output to the display means.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 23, the approach number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output to the display means when the front side member is opened. Therefore, information unrelated to the game (that is, entry number information or correspondence information) is not displayed on the display means during the player's game, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of distrust.

<Feature 24>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 20 to 23.
It is equipped with a substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variable display of symbols.
When the symbol is variablely displayed on the display means, the output means displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on the corner side of the display means. A featured gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 24, the approach number information or the corresponding information is displayed by the output means while the symbol is variable and displayed. During the game by the player (more specifically, during the variable display of the symbol), the approach number information or the corresponding information displayed on the display means can be confirmed.

In particular, the approach number information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, so that it is inconspicuous, and the player recognizes the approach number information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. This can be suitably suppressed. In addition, since the approach number information or the corresponding information that is displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the content that it means, and in that respect as well, the approach number information displayed on the display means. Alternatively, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from recognizing the corresponding information as information unrelated to the game.

<Feature 30>
A game area (game area) where a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance flows down,
A plurality of entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and into which the game ball can enter, and
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) that grants a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball has entered. 920) and
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. RAM) and the input means (rear setting switch) capable of inputting the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
When a predetermined condition regarding the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entry port among the plurality of entry openings is satisfied, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is stored. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for output.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 30, the "predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance" includes, for example, one or two or more predetermined ones among the plurality of entrances. The game ball enters the entrance of the ball, the game ball enters two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined order among the plurality of entrances, and the game balls enter the entrances of the plurality of entrances. It is updated according to the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into a predetermined number of entrances of one or two or more, and the entry into a predetermined number of entrances among a plurality of entrances. A predetermined condition is satisfied for the approach number information or the corresponding information counted in response to the approach number information, and a predetermined one among a plurality of entrances during a predetermined game period. Alternatively, a predetermined situation in which a new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the starting condition based on the entry of the game ball into two or more entrances is established is determined in advance. It includes the fact that it occurs a number of times.

<Feature 40>
A game area (game area) where a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance flows down,
A plurality of entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and into which the game ball can enter, and
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) that grants a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball has entered. 920) and
A setting storage means (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. RAM) and
Input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Switch 907) and
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entry port among the plurality of entry openings is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine, which can set the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

On the other hand, the gaming machines described in the feature 30 and the feature 40 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. To. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

Within the game area where the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance flows down, a plurality of entry ports into which the game ball can enter are provided, and among these plurality of entry openings, a predetermined entry port is provided. When the game ball enters the space, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance where the game ball has entered is granted by the privilege granting means. When a predetermined condition regarding the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entry port among a plurality of entry openings is satisfied, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Will be done. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the game property of guessing the probability information about the game machine being played through the establishment of a predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

Further, in order for the player to establish a predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to the lottery result such as the transition lottery of the gaming state, it is possible to increase the chance of paying attention to the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of a gaming ball, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number of ball openings.

In particular, in the gaming machine according to the feature 40, when a predetermined condition including the entry of the gaming ball into a predetermined entry slot among the plurality of entry openings is satisfied, the game machine is stored in the setting storage means. Since the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means, the player can predetermine the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery. It can be obtained as a privilege of having a game ball enter the entrance. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the game ball entering the predetermined entrance.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40.
As at least a part of the predetermined condition, the setting output means allows the gaming balls to enter two or more predetermined ball entrances among the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order. A gaming machine characterized in that the setting output information is output under the condition of.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 41, a predetermined condition (that is, a predetermined condition) is that the gaming balls enter into two or more predetermined entrances among a plurality of entrances in a predetermined order. , Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means assuming that at least a part of (a predetermined condition including the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entry port) is satisfied among a plurality of entry openings. Is output by the setting output means. As a result, the player is currently set as a lottery probability in which a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery as a privilege of allowing the game balls to enter the predetermined two or more entrances in a predetermined order. It is possible to enjoy the playability of obtaining information corresponding to the probability of being played. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game balls enter the predetermined two or more entrances in a predetermined order.

<Feature 50>
A launching means (launching device 330) that launches a game ball,
A game area (game area) in which a game ball launched by the launching means and entering from a predetermined entrance flows down.
A ball entry port (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and
A privilege giving means (main control board 920) that grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the entrance, and
Setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. ) And the input means (rear setting switch 905, which can input the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Initialization switch 907) and
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
The entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the entry number information (general winning number) updated in response to the entry of the game ball into the entry port, and
A predetermined condition including at least a condition that is satisfied corresponding to the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the corresponding information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information is satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine is provided with setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. ..

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine, which can set the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 50 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. To. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the information corresponding to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

In the game area where the game ball launched by the launching means and entering from the predetermined entrance flows down, an entrance for the game ball is provided, and when the game ball enters the entrance. Is granted a predetermined privilege according to the entrance of the ball by the privilege granting means. When a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance is satisfied, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the game property of guessing the probability information about the game machine being played through the establishment of a predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

Further, in order for the player to establish a predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to the lottery result such as the transition lottery of the gaming state, it is possible to increase the chance of paying attention to the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of a gaming ball, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number of ball openings.

Further, the approach number storage means stores the approach number information updated in response to the entry of the game ball into the entry port. Setting corresponding to the probability information stored in the set storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied for the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the approach number information. The output information is output by the setting output means. Since the approach number information and the corresponding information reflect the entry status of the game ball to the entrance, a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery according to the entry status of the game ball to the entrance. Information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability can be output.

Thereby, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value suggesting that the performance of the gaming machine may not meet the design value with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into the entrance, the predetermined condition indicates to the player. Therefore, it can be suggested that the situation may suffer a disadvantage, and the player is made to judge whether or not the game is continued by the gaming machine during the game by utilizing the information output by the setting output means. It becomes possible.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance for satisfying a predetermined start condition, and
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit changes and displays the identification information, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (secondary control board 940) and
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state, which is a game state, and
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined one. Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. Input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the board 920) and the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
During the predetermined gaming period, even if the predetermined first period elapses after the establishment of the starting condition, the predetermined condition including the situation where the new starting condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times is satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine is provided with setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. ..

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine, which can set the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 60 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit by the variable execution means, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is generated by the game control means after the stop display is displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance is satisfied, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Information can be suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add the game property of guessing the probability information about the game machine being played through the establishment of a predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

Further, in order for the player to establish a predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to the lottery result such as the transition lottery of the gaming state, it is possible to increase the chance of paying attention to the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of a gaming ball, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number of ball openings.

Further, during a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, if a situation in which the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times, it is stored in the setting storage means. The setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has passed after the starting condition is satisfied is an undesired situation for the player, and is a situation that is not desirable for the player, as compared with the case where the player plays a game on another gaming machine. May suffer disadvantages. On the other hand, under the circumstances, it is possible to make the player determine whether or not the game is continued by the gaming machine during the game by utilizing the information output by the setting output means.

In addition, instead of the description of the setting output means in the gaming machine described in the feature 60, when a predetermined condition including the entry of the gaming ball into a predetermined entrance as the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. , The setting output means for outputting the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means may be provided.

<Feature 70>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance for satisfying a predetermined start condition, and
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit changes and displays the identification information, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (secondary control board 940) and
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state, which is a game state, and
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined one. Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. Input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the board 920) and the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
At least a part of the period from the establishment of the start condition in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variable execution means. The effect selection means (main control board 920, sub) that selects the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means from among a plurality of types of effects having different effect times. Control board 940) and
A gaming machine comprising: an effect display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying an effect selected by the effect selection means on the display unit.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the playability of gaming machines that can set the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in multiple stages. On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit by the variable execution means, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is generated by the game control means after the stop display is displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

From among multiple types of effects with different effect times, the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means can be determined by the effect selection means, and the starting condition for which the first result is obtained in a predetermined lottery can be determined. It is selected as an effect consisting of at least a part of the period from the establishment to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variable execution means, and is displayed on the display unit by the effect display control means. To.

Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery is predetermined. A production consisting of at least a part of the period from the establishment of the start condition for which the first result is obtained in the lottery to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variable execution means. It is reflected in the production time of. Therefore, the player can estimate from the production time of the effect the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Can be added. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In addition, the player can increase the chances of paying attention to the length of the production time in order to infer the probability information. Therefore, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a gaming state, it is possible to increase the number of objects to be paid attention to, so that it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine using the flow of the gaming ball.

<Feature 71>
The gaming machine according to the feature 70.
The effect selection means is characterized in that, with respect to the probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probabilities, the effect is selected with the probability that the effect having the longest effect time among the plurality of types of effects is likely to be executed. A game machine to play.

In the game machine described in the feature 71, the most advantageous probability for the player among the plurality of configurable probabilities is selected with the probability that the longest production time is likely to be executed among the plurality of types of productions. Therefore, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the production is performed for a long time.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71.
Equipped with an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
The effect selected by the effect selection means is the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variable execution means after the start condition for which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery is satisfied. A special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation time set within the executable period of the effect consisting of at least a part of the period until the stop display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

If it is a gaming machine described in feature 72,
An effect consisting of at least a part of the period from the establishment of the start condition for which the first result is obtained in a predetermined lottery to the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result by the variable execution means. The operation time is set within the executable period of. The effect selected by the effect selection means is a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at the operation time. Therefore, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit at the operation time, and the lottery probability or the first result in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery from the production time of the special effect executed based on the operation. It is possible to estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the lottery of 2.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variable display of identification information, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance for satisfying a predetermined start condition, and
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit changes and displays the identification information, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (secondary control board). 940) and
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state, which is a game state, and
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined one. Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. Input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the board 920) and the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
A control executing means (main control board 920, sub-control) that executes control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied during the special gaming state is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by having a board 940) and.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine, which can set the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 80 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit by the variable execution means, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is generated by the game control means after the stop display is displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied is satisfied during the special game state, the control executing means executes control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. Therefore, the player has the probability information stored in the setting storage means based on the content displayed by the control by the control executing means, that is, in the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or in the second lottery. It is possible to add a playability to estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which a predetermined result is selected. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is preferable to include the entry of the gaming ball into a predetermined entrance during the special gaming state as a condition that can be established during the special gaming state. In order for the player to establish a predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it may be necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. can. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to the lottery result such as the transition lottery of the gaming state, it is possible to increase the chance of paying attention to the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of a gaming ball, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number of ball openings.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 80, as a condition that can be established during the special gaming state, an operation unit different from the operation unit that performs a firing operation in which the player launches a gaming ball into the gaming area during the special gaming state. It is preferable that the condition can be satisfied by the operation of. As a result, in the special gaming state, it is possible to add a game property that pays attention to an operation other than the firing operation, and the player can not only continue the firing operation but also add another operation to the probability. It is possible to add new playability that makes it possible to acquire information.

<Feature 90>
An approach restricted state (entrance prohibited posture) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening by being driven by a predetermined driving means, and an entry allowance that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. A movable member that can switch the state (permissible approach posture) and forms a descending inclined surface that can guide the game ball from one side to the other in the approach restricted state (movable piece of the right approach restricting mechanism 1452). )When,
When the movable member is in the entry allowable state, the second is to open upward with respect to the upstream side portion of the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow passage portions through which the game ball entered from the predetermined opening can pass. 1 flow passage part (1st flow passage part 1532A) and
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided on the downstream side of the first flow passage portion and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first flow passage portion, and
When the movable member is in the admissible state, the second flow passage portion (second) that opens upward from the first flow passage portion to the downstream portion on the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow passage portions. Flow passage part 1532B) and
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided on the downstream side of the second flow passage portion and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second flow passage portion, and
A privilege giving means (main control board 920) that grants a predetermined privilege when a game ball that has entered through the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit is provided.
The first flow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of changing the entry probability of a gaming ball into the inside by changing the posture (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213044). See publication). The prize-winning device is configured to be capable of transitioning between an entry-allowed posture that allows the entry of a game ball and an entry-restricted posture that regulates the entry of a game ball, and these posture changes are the entry restrictions provided by the prize-winning device. It is realized by changing the arrangement of the movable pieces of the mechanism. Then, after the movable piece of the winning device shifts to the entry allowable posture, when the winning of the specified number of game balls is detected by the detection unit such as the detection switch, the winning device is changed from the entry allowable posture to the entry restricted posture. By controlling the movement, it is possible to advance the game, such as the preparation period (interval) until the transition to the next allowable approach posture and the start of the next unit game.

However, in such a winning device, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration for appropriately advancing the game.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a movable member to suitably advance the game. That is, the movable member is driven by a predetermined driving means to restrict the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening and the approach that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. It is configured to be switchable from the allowable state, and forms a descending inclined surface that can guide the game ball from one side to the other in the approach restricted state.

The first flow passage portion of the plurality of flow passage portions through which the game ball that has entered through the predetermined opening can pass when the movable member is in the entry allowable state is upward with respect to the upstream portion on the descending inclined surface. It is open. A first detection unit capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first flow passage portion is provided on the downstream side of the first flow passage portion.

Further, of the plurality of flow passage portions, the second flow passage portion opens upward from the first flow passage portion with respect to the downstream portion on the downward slope surface. A second detection unit capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second flow passage portion is provided on the downstream side of the second flow passage portion. When a game ball that has entered through a predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit, the privilege granting means grants the predetermined privilege. Therefore, since the first flow passage portion is configured to be opened on the upstream side of the descending inclined surface from the second flow passage portion, the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening is the second flow down. It is easier to enter the first flow passage from the passage.

Here, the length of the first flow passage portion from the lower surface of the movable member in the approach restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, even if the distance from when the game ball enters the first flow passage to being detected by the first detection unit is long, the diameter of the game ball is suppressed to about the diameter of the game ball, so that the game enters the first flow passage. The time required for detection by the first detection unit can be suppressed to a short time.

Further, since the first flow-down passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows the game balls to enter one by one, when the game ball flows down the first flow-down passage portion, the game ball intersects the flow-down direction. It is possible to suppress the swinging in the direction. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first flow passage can smoothly flow down the first flow passage, and even at this point, from the time it enters the first flow passage until it is detected by the first detection unit. The time required for this can be reduced to a short time.

As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, the first flow-down passage portion where the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening is easier to enter than the second flow-down passage portion is the game ball. Is configured to have a passage width that allows entry one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection unit is configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball. Has been done.

Therefore, the time required from the entry of the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for one approach permissible posture, into the first flow passage section to the detection by the first detection section is preferably shortened. Therefore, it is possible to suitably shorten the time required from when the last game ball, which is the specified number, enters the first flow passage portion to when the movable member is switched to the entry restricted state. As a result, when the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for one approach permissible posture, enters the predetermined opening among the game balls flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening. Since the movable member is switched to the entry restricted state at an early stage from the approach, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the predetermined opening and winning a prize.

In addition, the time required from the entry of the last game ball, which is the specified number allowed for one approach permissible posture, into the first flow passage section to the detection by the first detection section is preferably shortened. Therefore, when the permissible approach posture is generated a plurality of times with a short interval between them, it is possible to appropriately easily detect the game ball even if the interval is set to a short time. Therefore, for example, during the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to generate a gaming state in which it is easy to prevent the game ball from advancing to the downstream side via the upper surface of the movable member, and the winning device including the movable member is made small. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the game area where the game ball flows down and the game parts such as the winning device and the decorative parts.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 90, "substantially equivalent to the diameter of the gaming ball" means that the length is larger than 1 times the diameter of the gaming ball and shorter than 1.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball. Is preferable, and it is preferable that the diameter is 1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Instead of the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned feature 90, a gaming machine having the following features may be used.

An approach restricted state (entrance prohibited posture) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening by being driven by a predetermined driving means, and an entry allowance that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. A movable member that can switch between states (permissible approach posture) and that forms a descending inclined surface that can guide the game ball from one side to the other in the entry restricted state (movable of the right approach restricting mechanism 1452). One) and
When the movable member is in the entry allowable state, the second is to open upward with respect to the upstream side portion of the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow passage portions through which the game ball entered from the predetermined opening can pass. 1 flow passage part (1st flow passage part 1532A) and
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided on the downstream side of the first flow passage portion and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first flow passage portion, and
When the movable member is in the admissible state, the second flow passage portion (second) that opens upward from the first flow passage portion to the downstream portion on the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow passage portions. Flow passage part 1532B) and
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided on the downstream side of the second flow passage portion and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second flow passage portion, and
A privilege giving means (main control board 920) that grants a predetermined privilege when the game ball that has entered through the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit.
A movable member control means that controls switching between the entry allowable state and the entry restricted state of the movable member, and is a game ball detected by the first detection unit when the movable member is in the entry allowable state. When is a predetermined number of game balls that are allowed to enter the predetermined opening in one entry allowable state, the predetermined driving means is driven following the detection of the game balls. The movable member control means (main control board 920) for switching the movable member to the entry allowable state is provided.
The first flow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

<Feature 91>
The gaming machine according to feature 90.
The first flow passage portion has a gradual change section that gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as the passage width of the first flow passage portion approaches the first detection portion, to the upstream side of the first detection portion. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 91, the first flow passage portion has a gradual change section in which the passage width of the first flow passage portion gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as the passage width approaches the first detection portion. It is provided on the upstream side of the first detection unit. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down passage portion is rectified in the flow-down direction as it advances in the flow-down direction in the gradual change section, so that the first detection section located on the downstream side of the gradual change section smoothly flows down. This makes it possible to suppress erroneous detection of the game ball by the first detection unit.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91.
A direction changing portion (protruding portions 1537, 1538) for meandering a gaming ball passing over the descending inclined surface formed by the movable member in the entry restricted state in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is provided.
The first flow passage portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball is opened upward on the upstream side of a position where the gaming ball is meandered in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the movable member is in the entry restricted state, the gaming ball passes through the descending inclined surface while meandering in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine by the turning portion. , It is possible to increase the staying time of the game ball on the descending slope. Therefore, the movable piece of the game ball passing through the descending inclined surface is switched to the admissible state next, while suppressing the opening width of the predetermined opening in the descending inclined surface in the passing direction from becoming large. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering a predetermined opening at the timing.

Further, since the first flow-down passage portion opens upward on the upstream side of the position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side toward a predetermined opening. Can enter the first flow passage section before the meandering in the anteroposterior direction by the turning section is started.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 92, the "position where the gaming ball is meandered in the front-rear direction by the turning portion" may be a position before the gaming ball reaches the turning portion, or the game. It may be in a position where the ball has moved either forward or backward by the turning part. For example, when the first flow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side of the position where the game ball is moved to either the front or the rear by the direction change portion, the course direction of the game ball is changed by the turn change portion. By changing it, a situation may occur in which it is easy to enter the first flow passage portion.
<Feature A0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is advantageous as compared with a normal gaming state. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state and generates a predetermined specific gaming state with a predetermined probability when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result that does not accompany the occurrence of the special gaming state.
A variable winning section (right) that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters, at least in the entry allowed state where the game ball is allowed to enter and the entry restricted state where the game ball is restricted from entering. Grand prize device 1434) and
When the special gaming state or the specific gaming state occurs, the winning control is performed in a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each gaming state to switch between the entry allowable state and the entry restricted state in the variable winning unit. Means (main control board 920) and
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined one. Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. (RAM of board 920) and
Input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Switch 907) and
A setting changing means (main control board 920) that changes the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means, and
The variable winning unit by the winning control means according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means so that the specific gaming state is generated differently according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a switching control setting means (main control board 920) for setting switching control.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery for shifting from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a game hall manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example,). See JP-A-2007-202870).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine, which can set the lottery probability in which the predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is the first result, a special gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state occurs. do. When the lottery result is the second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state is generated with a predetermined probability.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a special gaming state or a specific gaming state occurs, the winning control means switches between the entry allowable state and the entry restricted state in the variable winning unit in a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each gaming state. Switching control By the switching control setting means, the variable winning unit is switched by the winning control means according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means so that the specific gaming state is generated differently according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. Control is set. Therefore, based on the control of switching of the variable winning unit in the specific gaming state, the player has the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or the second lottery. It is possible to add a playability to estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which a predetermined result is selected. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine described in Feature A0.
In the switching by the winning control means, after the variable winning unit is switched to the entry permissible state, until a predetermined duration for sustaining the entry permissible state elapses, or a predetermined number of game balls are subjected to the variable winning state. Including switching the variable winning section to the entry restricted state when any of the conditions up to entering the section is satisfied.
The switching control setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that a switching pattern having at least a predetermined duration different from each other according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is set as the predetermined switching pattern.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature A1, the variable winning section is switched by the winning control means after the variable winning section is switched to the admissible entry state until a predetermined duration for maintaining the permissible entry state elapses. , Or, when any of the conditions until a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable winning section is satisfied, the variable winning section is switched to the entry restricted state. Since the switching control setting means sets a different switching pattern as a predetermined switching pattern according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means for at least a predetermined duration, the variable winning unit is maintained in the entry allowable state in the specific gaming state. Based on the duration to be set, it is possible to add a game property in which the player infers the probability information stored in the set storage means.

<Feature A2>
The gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1.
The gaming machine is less likely to generate the specific gaming state than the specific gaming high probability state (probability variation gaming state) in which the specific gaming state is likely to occur when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the specific gaming high probability state. It generates a specific game low probability state (normal game state), and
The setting storage means has a probability corresponding to a probability of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state (probability of changing game end) as a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected by the second lottery. A gaming machine characterized by storing at least information (big hit probability at high probability and probability change continuation rate).

In the game machine described in the feature A2, a specific game high probability state in which a specific game state is likely to occur when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a specific game in which a specific game state is less likely to occur than the specific game high probability state. It is configured to be able to generate a low probability state, and the setting storage means has a probability of transitioning a specific game high probability state to a specific game low probability state as a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected by a second lottery. At least the probability information corresponding to is stored.

Therefore, based on the control of switching of the variable winning portion in the specific game state, the game property of estimating the probability currently set as the probability that the player transitions the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state is added. can do. As a result, the player decides whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine being played, depending on whether or not the probability estimated as the probability of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state is preferable to himself or herself. Since it can be determined, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature B0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is advantageous as compared with a normal gaming state. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific gaming state (small hit) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state. There,
There is a special game high probability state (probability variation game state) in which the special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a probability that the special game state occurs from the special game high probability state. It is configured to be able to execute control to generate a low special game low probability state (normal game state), and as the special game high probability state, the first special game high probability state (time-saving probabilistic game state) and the above-mentioned It is now possible to execute control to generate a second special game high probability state (non-time-saving probabilistic game state) in which a player can easily acquire a game value by generating the specific game state as compared with the first special game high probability state. Configured,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special game high probability state is generated over a predetermined execution period after the end of the special gaming state, and the predetermined execution period. When the game state control means (main control board 920) that ends the first special game high probability state and transitions to the second special game high probability state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, it corresponds to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the stored information or information for which the remaining period can be calculated, and
A display device (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying identification information for displaying the lottery result of the lottery means, and
When the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, the first display updated according to the change of the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage means. (Remaining period display unit 1711) and a second display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the second special game high probability state occurs and updated according to a change in the remaining period. A gaming machine comprising: a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a display (game state display unit 1712 after transition) on the display device together with the identification information.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big prize opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won. Further, in this type of gaming machine, after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming ball is easier to enter into the starting port than in the probabilistic gaming state in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the normal gaming state or in the normal gaming state. It is also known that the game is diversified by generating a predetermined advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state such as a state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-189873).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate different types of gaming states after the end of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is the predetermined first result, the special gaming state which is advantageous as compared with the normal gaming state. Occurs. When the lottery result is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of a special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state occurs.

A special game high probability state in which a special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a special game low probability state in which the probability that the special game state occurs is lower than the special game high probability state. As a special game high probability state, the player can play a game due to the occurrence of the first special game high probability state and the specific game state as compared with the first special game high probability state. It is configured to be feasible to control to generate a second special game with a high probability state in which it is easy to acquire value. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the game state control means generates the first special game high probability state for a predetermined execution period after the end of the special game state. When the predetermined execution period ends, the first special game high probability state is terminated and the transition to the second special game high probability state is made.

When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, the predetermined execution period in the first special game high probability state. Information corresponding to the remaining period or information capable of calculating the remaining period is stored in the remaining period information storage means. A display device capable of displaying identification information for displaying the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and when the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state, the display device stores information for the remaining period. The first display and the second special game height that are updated according to the change of the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the means (information corresponding to the remaining period for a predetermined execution period or information that can calculate the remaining period). The display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the probability state occurs and updated according to the change in the remaining period is displayed on the display device together with the identification information by the display control means. Will be done.

Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the first special game high probability state and the second special game high probability can be continuously generated after the end of the special game state, the first display is a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. The second display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second special game high probability state occurs is also updated according to the change in the remaining period, so that the game is updated. The person is aware that the time for the game state to transition from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state is gradually approaching due to the updated first display, and the second is updated. Depending on the display, the game state is changed to a game state (second special game high probability state) in which the player can easily acquire the game value due to the occurrence of the specific game state compared to the current game state (first special game high probability state). You can be aware that the time of transition will come soon. As a result, when the first special game high probability state occurs after the special game state, the player expects the transition of the game state from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. Can be suitably improved.

<Feature B1>
The gaming machine described in feature B0.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first display and the second display are displayed on one side of the screen of the display device.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature B1, since the first display and the second display are displayed on one side of the screen of the display device, the player can display the first display and the second display without moving the line of sight significantly. It becomes possible to visually recognize. Therefore, since the player can recognize both the update status of the first display and the update status of the second display at the same time, the player changes from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is possible to more preferably improve the playability in which the transition of the gaming state of the above is expected.

<Feature B2>
The gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B2.
The display control means reduces the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display as the remaining period decreases, or increases the overlap between the first display and the second display. A gaming machine featuring.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature B2, as the remaining period decreases, the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display becomes closer, or the overlap between the first display and the second display becomes larger. , From the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display and the overlapping situation of the first display and the second display, the player changes from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is easy to grasp the arrival of the time when the game state changes. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the playability in which the player expects the transition of the gaming state from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state.

<Feature C0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is advantageous as compared with a normal gaming state. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific gaming state (small hit) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state. There,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (time saving state, probable change state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state is performed. A gaming state control means (main control) that is generated and transitions from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state when the specific gaming state occurs a predetermined number of times after the start of the advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a board 920).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big prize opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won. In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, as a lottery result by the lottery, a lottery result (for example, a small hit) that allows a game ball to win a prize in a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit has been provided to diversify the game. Also known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-189873).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of the gaming machine because a lottery result is provided so that the gaming ball can win a prize in the winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature C0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is the predetermined first result, the special gaming state which is advantageous as compared with the normal gaming state. Occurs. When the lottery result is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of a special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state occurs.

In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the game state control means generates a predetermined advantageous game state which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state. When a predetermined number of specific gaming states occur after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is changed to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by selecting the second result as a lottery result, the specific gaming state is a condition for transitioning the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. By applying the number of occurrences of, it is possible to add the game property that the gaming state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine described in feature C0, the gaming state control means "in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special gaming state, from the normal gaming state. When a predetermined advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated and the specific gaming state occurs a predetermined number of times after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is different from the advantageous gaming state. Although it is said that the configuration is "transition to", "in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result", after the end of the special gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. When a predetermined advantageous gaming state is generated and the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, when a predetermined execution period predetermined for the advantageous gaming state ends, or when the advantageous gaming state ends. When the specific gaming state occurs a predetermined number of times after the start of the gaming state, the advantageous gaming state may be changed to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. "

<Feature C1>
Feature C0 is the gaming machine described in
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second result, any one of the plurality of types of the specific gaming states can be generated with a predetermined probability for each type of the specific gaming state.
A number information storage means for storing the number information corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states is provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state control means has the number of times information storage means after the start of the advantageous gaming state. When the specific gaming state corresponding to the number of times information associated with one specific gaming state among the plurality of types of specific gaming states occurs, the advantageous gaming state is different from the advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning to a gaming state.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C1, the number of times information storage means can be set to any of a plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states. Corresponding number of times information is stored in association with each other.

When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state control means causes a plurality of types of specific games in the number-of-times information storage means after the start of the advantageous gaming state. When a specific gaming state corresponding to the number of times information stored in association with one of the specific gaming states occurs, the advantageous gaming state is changed to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. To. Therefore, since a plurality of types of specific gaming states are provided and the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state is determined according to the type of the specific gaming state, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are various. Therefore, the game property that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state can be suitably diversified.

<Characteristic C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1.
A game at a time when the special gaming state is generated based on the type of lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or the lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Each of the plurality of types of count conditions including at least one of the state types is associated with the number of times information corresponding to any of the plurality of types of counts that can be used as the predetermined number of times. Equipped with information storage means (ROM of main control board 920)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state and the number-of-times condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means determines the lottery result. When the specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number of times information associated with the number of times condition is generated in the number of times information storage means after the start of the advantageous gaming state generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the above. In addition, a gaming machine characterized by transitioning from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C2, the number of times information storage means is a type of lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or a lottery that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. A plurality of types of times that can be used as a predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of types of number conditions configured including at least one of the types of the gaming state at the time when the special gaming state occurs based on the result. The number of times information corresponding to any of the number of times is associated and stored.

If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state and the above-mentioned number of times condition is satisfied, the special game is performed by the gaming state control means based on the lottery result. After the start of the advantageous gaming state that occurred after the end of the state, when the specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in association with the number of times condition occurs in the number of times information storage means, from the advantageous gaming state. The transition to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is made. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as the condition for transitioning the gaming state is diversified according to the type of the number of times condition, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are diversified according to the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state. It is possible to suitably diversify the game playability that the game state can be changed.

<Characteristic C3>
A gaming machine according to any one of feature C0 to feature C2.
When the advantageous gaming state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state control means generates the specific gaming state a predetermined number of times after the start of the advantageous gaming state, or A gaming machine characterized in that when the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state is changed from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C3, when an advantageous gaming state is generated by the gaming state control means after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined number of specific gaming states are generated after the start of the advantageous gaming state. If this is the case, or if a special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state control means transitions from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, since the game state is changed not only when the specific game state occurs a predetermined number of times but also when the special game state occurs after the start of the advantageous game state, the game state that occurs after the special game state occurs. It is possible to diversify the playability that changes.

<Feature D0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is advantageous as compared with a normal gaming state. A gaming machine configured to generate a special gaming state (big hit) and to change the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the special gaming state occurs.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state, one of a plurality of types of specific gaming states (small hits) is predetermined for each type of the specific gaming state. It is configured to be probable
When the number of occurrences of at least one specific gaming state among the plurality of types of specific gaming states reaches a predetermined number of times for the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is different from the predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming state control means (main control board 920) for transitioning to a state.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big prize opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won. Further, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, as a lottery result by the lottery, a lottery result (for example, a small hit) is provided so that a game ball can win a prize in a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-189873).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of the gaming machine because a lottery result is provided so that the gaming ball can win a prize in the winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature D0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is the predetermined first result, the special gaming state which is advantageous as compared with the normal gaming state. Occurs. When the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state may change after the end of the special gaming state. Further, when the lottery result is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state, any one of a plurality of types of specific gaming states occurs with a probability determined in advance for each type of the specific gaming state. do.

When the number of occurrences of at least one specific gaming state among a plurality of types of specific gaming states reaches a predetermined number of times for the specific gaming state, the gaming state control means is used to change the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined number. It is transitioned to a game state different from the game state of. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by selecting the second result as a lottery result, the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state is applied as a condition for transitioning the gaming state, so that the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state is applied. It is possible to add a game property that the game state can be changed according to the above.

In particular, since a plurality of types of specific gaming states are provided and the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state is determined according to the type of the specific gaming state, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are various. Therefore, the game property that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state can be suitably diversified.

<Feature D1>
The gaming machine described in feature D0.
A game at a time when the special gaming state is generated based on the type of lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or the lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. A plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states for each of the number of times conditions in the plurality of types of number conditions including at least one of the types of states. A number information storage means (ROM of the main control board 920) for storing the number information corresponding to any of the number of times in association with each other is provided.
The game state control means is a case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the predetermined game state after the end of the special game state, and when the number of times condition is satisfied, the lottery result. After the start of the predetermined gaming state generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the above, the specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number of times information associated with the number of times condition is generated in the number of times information storage means. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized by transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D1, the number of times information storage means is a type of lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or a lottery that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Based on the result, for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states in advance for each of the multiple types of number of times conditions configured including at least one of the types of gaming states at the time when the special gaming state occurs. The number of times information corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of times that can be used as a determined number of times is stored in association with each other.

If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state and the number of times condition is satisfied, the special gaming state is based on the lottery result by the gaming state control means. When a specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in association with the number of times condition occurs in the number of times information storage means after the start of the predetermined gaming state generated after the end of the above, from the advantageous gaming state. The transition to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is made. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as the condition for transitioning the gaming state is diversified according to the type of the number of times condition, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are diversified according to the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state. It is possible to suitably diversify the game playability that the game state can be changed.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to D1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operating means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined gaming area, and a pachinko machine. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and grants a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Game machine, 102 ... Front block, 252 ... Launch handle, 330 ... Launch device, 433 ... Lower prize prize device, 434 ... Upper prize prize device, 474 ... Nail state level display device, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device, 439A , 439B ... general winning device, 920 ... main control board, 930 ... payout control board, 940 ... sub control board, 2439A, 2439B ... general winning device, 905 ... rear setting switch, 907 ... initialization switch, 261 ... pressing operation device , 1434 ... Right Grand Prize Device, 1442A, 1442B ... Right Start Winning Switch, 1452 ... Right Entry Control Mechanism, 1532A ... First Flow Passage, 1532B ... Second Flow Passage, 1537, 1538 ... Projection, 1711 ... Remaining Period display unit, 1712 ... Game status display unit after transition

Claims (1)

A lottery means for performing a big hit and a small hit lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and a normal gaming state is obtained when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result corresponding to the predetermined big hit winning. When a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the above is generated and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result corresponding to a predetermined small hit winning without the occurrence of the special gaming state, the predetermined small A gaming machine that generates a predetermined specific gaming state corresponding to a winning win.
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result, after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is generated, and the advantageous gaming state is generated. When the predetermined number of small hits is won after the start of the gaming state and the specific gaming state corresponding to the winning of the predetermined small hit occurs, the advantageous gaming state is changed from the advantageous gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a gaming state control means for transitioning to a different gaming state.

Images